Եզեկիէլ / Ezekiel - 38 |

Text:
< PreviousԵզեկիէլ - 38 Ezekiel - 38Next >

jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ac▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
Далее возвращения избранного народа из плена и его счастливой жизни в обетованной земле другие пророки большею частью не простирают своих предсказаний об Израиле. У такого эсхатолога, как пророк Иезекииль, пророческий взор, естественно, проникает далее и прослеживает судьбу Израиля до окончательного осуществления на нем всех обетований Божиих. Это осуществление невозможно, пока языческий мир будет силен на земле: с его стороны всегда возможно возобновление борьбы против народа Божия. Для полного благоденствия последнего необходимо, чтобы этот мир был совсем обессилен. Кроме того, возвращением избранного народа из плена и водворением его на обетованной земле не будет восстановлена окончательно честь имени Божия, не смыт с него совсем тот позор, которому подвергло его в глазах народов унижение Израиля. А славой имени Божия определяется по Иезекиилю главным образом отношение Бога к миру. Окончательное прославление этого великого имени или, что тоже, признание язычниками Иеговы Богом требует нового и уже последнего обнаружения славы Божией на земле, обнаружения небывалого, через небывалое доселе решительное ослабление, близкое к полному уничтожению языческого мира на земле, ослабление, которое уничтожило бы последнее сомнение в ком-либо в исключительном, единственном величии имени Божия. Эту-то последнюю борьбу враждебного Богу мира на земле с царством Божиим, борьбу, имеющуюся окончиться полным ослаблением, если не совершенным уничтожением первого мира, изображают XXXVIII и XXXIX главы под видом войны отдаленнейших и разнообразнейших народов с Гогом во главе против нового Израиля. Естественно, что эта борьба, которая в Новом Завете изображается более с ее духовной стороны, как борьба антихриста и его лжеучения с Христом и Его истиной, у ветхозаветного пророка, писавшего в эпоху повсеместных кровавых войн и слабой идейной борьбы, представлена в виде войны. Впрочем то не значит, что все черты в этом представлении имеют лишь символическое значение и требуют духовного лишь приложения. Возможно, что Иезекииль рисует с вещественной стороны ту самую борьбу, которую Новый Завет описывает с духовной и идейной стороны. На земле все духовное так тесно соединено с телесным и физическим, что никакая борьба не может быть лишь духовной. Как и во всех предсказаниях последних глав, пророк Иезекииль и в этих двух созерцает прежде всего судьбу послепленного Израиля, его действительно героическое отстаивание своей народности и веры от неизмеримо сильнейшего физически его языческого мира, давившего на него со всех сторон и не могшаго однако уничтожить этого маленького народца, который в конце концов (в лице христианства) одержал над ним решительную победу. Должны были и язычники, которые не приходили в непосредственное соприкосновени с Израилем (как язычники XXV-XXXII гл.), почувствовать могущество Иеговы. Замечательно, что этого последнего суда над язычеством Иезекииль ждет уже после большего изменения вещей; у него полное обновление мира и спасение распадается на два акта: второй открывается низложением Гога, как первый гибелью языческих соседей Израиля. - Краски для изображения этой великой борьбы Иезекииль берет, как полагают, не столько от походов Навуходоносора, сколько от имевшего место около временя Иосии нашествия скифов на Переднюю Азию, которое тогда на долгое время навело страх на всю Азию; от этого нашествия берут краски для изображения суда Божия (“дня Господня”) и даже прямо описывают его Иеремия III-VI и Софония; указывает на это нашествие должно быть и Иез XXXII:26-27. Можно было не сомневаться, что тогдашнее политическое положение не исключало возможности повторения этого нашествия. С севера проникали на юг все новые полчища скифов и брали предводительствование прежними. То, что Иезекииль называет Гогом, было реальной величиной его времени (Сменд). В этом убеждает сравнение XXXVIII:2-3; XXXIX:2: с XXXVIII:5-6: и XXXII:26. Хотя нашествие Гога впоследствии стало образом боговраждебного мирского могущества, которое погибнет при мировом суде (Откр XX:7: и д). но Гог приходит не как враг Иеговы или Израиля; он об Иегове ничего не знает и ищет только добычи (XXXVIII:12-13); это его грех (Сменд). Пророчество некоторые относят к Вавилону. Действительно, хотя пророк Иезекииль смотрит на халдеев, как на исполнителей поручения Божия относительно Иудеи и ее кары, а потому неответственных за то зло, какое они причинили Иудее, но это поручение они могли исполнить с излишней жестокостью. Так и Исаия переходит к угрозам Ассирии, в которой он видел наказующий жезл Божий (Ис X:5: и д.); и пророки конца плена говорят о близкой гибели Вавилона; падение Вавилонской монархии, по-видимому, являлось необходимым предварительным условием для освобождения Израиля и Иезекииля, как ранее Иеремие, не была чужда мысль о таком падении: ХХIX:13: и д. ср. IV:4-5; XXXIV:12, 27. В самых именах Гог и Магог видят прикровенное указание на Вавилон. Было высказано мнение (Bohmer в Zeitschrift fur wissensch Theologie 1897, S. 321), что в имени Магог Иезекииль дает имя Вавилона по одному из принятых в каббалистике способов, а именно через замену каждой буквы (согласной) следующею по алфавиту и через чтение слова в обратном порядке. Вавилон, по евр. Вавел, имеет согласные буквы ввл, следующие за ними пм, - обратно мп, магог. Но пророчество о Гоге относится ко временам более поздним, чем падение Вавилонской монархии, к тем, когда Израиль, возвратившийся из плена, достигнет уже значительного благоденствия на св. земле (XXXVI:33: и д.). От предсказания гибели Вавилону пророка должен был удерживать, конечно, не страх пред могущественным победителем (пророки не знали страха пред земным могуществом), а польза слушателей. Если страдания плена должны были еще принести свои плоды, то не время было уже направлять взор народа на грех Вавилона и его верную конечную гибель.

Речь XXXVIII гл., кроме вступления, 1-2: ст., содержит три части: 2-9: ст. развивают мысль, что, в сущности, сам Иегова в последние дни привлечет Гога как бы даже против его желания в свою землю, чтобы в уничтожении его явить всемогущество. В параллельных к этой части ст. 10-16: (ср. ст. 9: и 16) доказывается, что, с другой стороны, Гог будет привлечен своею жаждою добычи. Ст. 17-23: говорят о каре Гога, ее соответствии пророческим предсказаниям и впечатлении на мир, через которое последний узнает Иегову.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
This chapter, and that which follows it, are concerning Gog and Magog, a powerful enemy to the people of Israel, that should make a formidable descent upon them, and put them into a consternation, but their army should be routed and their design defeated; and this prophecy, it is most probable, had its accomplishment some time after the return of the people of Israel out of their captivity, whether in the struggles they had with the kings of Syria, especially Antiochus Epiphanes, or perhaps in some other way not recorded, we cannot tell. If the sacred history of the Old Testament had reached as far as the prophecy, we should have been better able to understand these chapters, but, for want of that key, we are locked out of the meaning of them. God had by the prophet assured his people of happy times after their return to their own land; but lest they should mistake the promises which related to the kingdom of the Messiah and the spiritual privileges of that the kingdom of the Messiah and the spiritual privileges of that kingdom, as if from them they might promise themselves an uninterrupted temporal prosperity, he here tells them, as Christ told his disciples to prevent the like mistake, that in the world they shall have tribulation, but they may be of good cheer, for they shall be victorious at last. This prophecy here of Gog and Magog is without doubt alluded to in that prophecy which relates to the latter days, and which seems to be yet unfulfilled (Rev. xx. 8), that Gog and Magog shall be gathered to battle against the camp of the saints, as the Old-Testament prophecies of the destruction of Babylon are alluded to, Rev. xviii. But, in both, the Old-Testament prophecies had their accomplishment in the Jewish church as the New-Testament prophecies shall have when the time comes in the Christian church. In this chapter we have intermixed, I. The attempt that Gog and Magog should make upon the land of Israel, the vast army they should bring into the field, and their vast preparations (ver. 4-7), their project and design in it (ver. 8-13), God's hand in it, ver. 4. II. The great terror that this should strike upon the land of Israel, ver. 15, 16, 18-20. III. The divine restraint that these enemies should be under, and the divine protection that Israel should be under, ver. 2-4 and ver. 14. IV. The defeat that should be given to those enemies by the immediate hand of God (ver. 21-23), which we shall hear more of in the next chapter.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
The sublime prophecy contained in this and the following chapter relates to Israel's victory over Gog, and is very obscure. It begins with representing a prodigious armament of many nations combined together under the conduct of Gog, with the intention of overwhelming the Jews, after having been for some time resettled in their land subsequent to their return from the Babylonish captivity, Eze 38:1-9. These enemies are farther represented as making themselves sure of the spoil, Eze 38:10-13. But in this critical conjuncture when Israel, to all human appearance, was about to be swallowed up by her enemies, God most graciously appears, to execute by terrible judgments the vengeance threatened against these formidable adversaries of his people, Eze 38:14-16. The prophet, in terms borrowed from human passions, describes, with awful emphasis, the fury of Jehovah as coming up to his face; and the effects of it so dreadful, as to make all the animate and inanimate creation tremble, and even to convulse with terror the whole frame of nature, Eze 38:17-23.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
Eze 38:1, The army, Eze 38:8, and malice of Gog; Eze 38:14, God's judgment against him.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch

Destruction of Gog with His Great Army of Nations - Ezekiel 38 and 39
Gog, in the land of Magog, prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, will invade the restored land of Israel from the far distant northern land by the appointment of God in the last times, and with a powerful army of numerous nations (Ezek 38:1-9), with the intention of plundering Israel, now dwelling in security, that the Lord may sanctify Himself upon him before all the world (Ezek 38:10-16). But when Gog, of whom earlier prophets have already prophesied, shall fall upon Israel, he is to be destroyed by a wrathful judgment from the Lord, that the nations may know that God is the Lord (Ezek 38:17-23). On the mountains of Israel will Gog with all his hosts and nations succumb to the judgment of God (Ezek 39:1-8). The inhabitants of the cities of Israel will spend seven years in burning the weapons of the fallen foe, and seven months in burying the corpses in a valley, which will receive its name from this, so as to purify the land (Ezek 38:9-16); whilst in the meantime all the birds and wild beasts will satiate themselves with the flesh and blood of the fallen (Ezek 38:17-20). By this judgment will all the nations as well as Israel know that it was on account of its sins that the Lord formerly gave up Israel into the power of the heathen, but that now He will no more forsake His redeemed people, because He has poured out His Spirit upon it (Ezek 38:21 -29).
John Gill
INTRODUCTION TO EZEKIEL 38
This chapter gives an account of an enemy of the Jews, under the name of Gog, that shall invade their land, and disturb their peace, after they are settled in it; who is described by the countries over which he rules; and against whom the prophet is bid to set his face, and prophesy of him, the Lord being against him; and who would cause him to return from Judea unsuccessful, Ezek 38:1, the number of his confederates, their warlike accoutrements and preparations for the invasion of the land of Israel, are foretold, Ezek 38:4, his wicked designs and intentions to spoil and plunder the inhabitants of it, Ezek 38:10, the notice taken of his projects by the merchants of Tarshish and others, Ezek 38:13, his coming up to invade the land is again observed for the certainty of it; and the place from whence, and the time when he should come, are mentioned, as well as God's design in it, and which had been before predicted by his prophets, Ezek 38:14, and the chapter is concluded with a denunciation of divine wrath, which shall be terrible to all the inhabitants of the earth, and to all creatures in heaven, earth, and sea; when he and his forces shall be destroyed by the sword, by pestilence, and by dreadful storms and tempests, Ezek 38:18, of which destruction a fuller account is given in the next chapter.
38:038:0: ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ՝ եւ Մագովգայ[12903]։ ԼԵ [12903] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ՝ եւ Մագովգայ։
1 Գոգի ու Մագոգի մասին
Ի վերայ Գովգայ եւ Մագովգայ:

38:0: ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ՝ եւ Մագովգայ[12903]։ ԼԵ
[12903] ՚Ի բազումս պակասի. ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ՝ եւ Մագովգայ։
1 Գոգի ու Մագոգի մասին
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:0
38:1 καὶ και and; even ἐγένετο γινομαι happen; become λόγος λογος word; log κυρίου κυριος lord; master πρός προς to; toward με με me λέγων λεγω tell; declare
38:1 וַ wa וְ and יְהִ֥י yᵊhˌî היה be דְבַר־ ḏᵊvar- דָּבָר word יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH אֵלַ֥י ʔēlˌay אֶל to לֵ lē לְ to אמֹֽר׃ ʔmˈōr אמר say
38:1. et factus est sermo Domini ad me dicensAnd the word of the Lord came to me, saying:
1. And the word of the LORD came unto me, saying,
missing verse:

38:1
καὶ και and; even
ἐγένετο γινομαι happen; become
λόγος λογος word; log
κυρίου κυριος lord; master
πρός προς to; toward
με με me
λέγων λεγω tell; declare
38:1
וַ wa וְ and
יְהִ֥י yᵊhˌî היה be
דְבַר־ ḏᵊvar- דָּבָר word
יְהוָ֖ה [yᵊhwˌāh] יְהוָה YHWH
אֵלַ֥י ʔēlˌay אֶל to
לֵ lē לְ to
אמֹֽר׃ ʔmˈōr אמר say
38:1. et factus est sermo Domini ad me dicens
And the word of the Lord came to me, saying:
1. And the word of the LORD came unto me, saying,
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jw▾ jg▾ kad▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:1: The last conflict of the world with God, and the complete overthrow of the former. This section Eze. 38-39 refers to times subsequent to the restoration of Israel. As the Church (the true Israel) waxes stronger and stronger, more distant nations will come into collision and must be overthrown before the triumph is complete. Some have thought that this prophecy is directed against the Scythians who had possession of Asia twenty-three years, and in the course of this time had overrun Syria, and had probably made their appearance in the holy land. But in this prophecy there is little distinctive of one nation. It is a gathering together of the enemies of Yahweh to make their last effort, and to be overthrown. The seer passes to the final struggle between Good and Evil, and the triumphant establishment of the divine rule. It is the same struggle which is depicted in the Book of Rev_elation Eze 20:7-10, where John adopts words and phrases of Ezekiel.
There are four main divisions of this prophecy:
(1) Eze 38:1-13, describing Gog's march;
(2) Eze 38:14-23, describing his punishment;
(3) Ezek. 39:1-16, describing his ruin;
(4) Eze 39:17-29, the issue of Gog's ruin in Israel's redemption and sanctification.
Each division is broken up like a poem into stanzas.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
38:1
Introduction
Preparation of Gog and his army for the invasion of the restored land of Israel. - Ezek 38:1. And the word of Jehovah came to me, saying, Ezek 38:2. Son of man, set thy face toward Gog in the land of Magog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, and prophesy against him, Ezek 38:3. And say, Thus saith the Lord Jehovah, Behold, I will deal with thee, Gog, thou prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, Ezek 38:4. And will mislead thee, and will put rings in thy jaws, and lead thee out, and all thine army, horses, and riders, all clothed in perfect beauty, a great assembly, with buckler and shield, all wielding swords; Ezek 38:5. Persian, Ethiopian, and Libyan with them, all of them with shield and helmet; Ezek 38:6. Gomer and all his hosts, the house of Togarmah in the uttermost north with all his hosts; many peoples with thee. Ezek 38:7. Be prepared and make ready, thou and all thine assembly, who have assembled together to thee, and be thou their guard. Ezek 38:8. After many days shalt thou be visited, at the end of the years shalt thou come into the land, which is brought back from the sword, gathered out of many peoples, upon the mountains of Israel, which were constantly laid waste, but now it is brought out of the nations, and they dwell together in safety; Ezek 38:9. And thou shalt come up, come like a storm, like a cloud to cover the land, thou and all thy hosts and many peoples with thee. - Ezek 38:1 and Ezek 38:2. Command to prophesy against God. גּוג, Gog, the name of the prince against whom the prophecy is directed, is probably a name which Ezekiel has arbitrarily formed from the name of the country, Magog; although Gog does occur in 1Chron 5:4 as the name of a Reubenite, of whom nothing further is known. The construction גּוג ארץ מגוג, Gog of the land of Magog, is an abbreviated expression for "Gog from the land of Magog;" and 'ארץ מג is not to be taken in connection with שׂים פּניך, as the local object ("toward Gog, to the land of Magog"), as Ewald and Hvernick would render it; since it would be very difficult in that case to explain the fact that גּוג is afterwards resumed in the apposition 'נשׂיא וגו.
מגוג, Magog, is the name of a people mentioned in Gen 10:2 as descended from Japhet, according to the early Jewish and traditional explanation, the great Scythian people; and here also it is the name of a people, and is written with the article (המגוג), to mark the people as one well known from the time of Genesis, and therefore properly the land of the Magog (-people). Gog is still further described as the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal. It is true that Ewald follows Aquila, the Targum, and Jerome, and connects ראשׁ with נשׂיא as an appellative in the sense of princeps capitis, chief prince. But the argument used in support of this explanation, namely, that there is no people of the name of Rosh mentioned either in the Old Testament or by Josephus, is a very weak one; whilst, on the other hand, the appellative rendering, though possible, no doubt, after the analogy of הכּהן ראשׁ in 1Chron 27:5, is by no means probable, for the simple reason that the נשׂיא occurs again in Ezek 38:3 and Ezek 39:1, and in such repetitions circumstantial titles are generally abbreviated. The Byzantine and Arabic writers frequently mention a people called ̔Ρῶς, Arab. Ru=s, dwelling in the country of the Taurus, and reckoned among the Scythian tribes (for the passages, see Ges. Thesaurus, p. 1253), so that there is no reason to question the existence of a people known by the name of Rosh; even though the attempt of Bochart to find a trace of such a people in the ̔Ρωξαλᾶνοι (Ptol. iii. 5) and Roxalani (Plin. h. n. iv. 12), by explaining this name as formed from a combination of Rhos (Rhox) and Alani, is just as doubtful as the conjecture, founded upon the investigations of Frhn (Ibn Foszlan, u. a. Araber Berichte ber die Russen lterer Zeit, St. Petersburg 1823), that the name of the Russians is connected with this ̔Ρῶς, Arab. ru=s, and our ראשׁ. Meshech and Tubal (as in Ezek 27:13 and Ezek 32:26), the Moschi and Tibareni of classical writers (see the comm. on Gen 10:2), dwelt, according to the passage before us, in the neighbourhood of Magog. There were also found in the army of Gog, according to Ezek 38:5, Pharas (Persians), Cush, and Phut (Ethiopians and Libyans, see the comm. on Ezek 30:5 and Ezek 27:10), and, according to Ezek 38:6, Gomer and the house of Togarmah. From a comparison of this list with Gen 10:2, Kliefoth draws the conclusion that Ezekiel omits all the peoples mentioned in Gen 10:2 as belonging to the family of Japhet, who had come into historical notice in his time, or have done so since, namely, the Medes, Greeks, and Thracians; whilst, on the other hand, he mentions all the peoples enumerated, who have never yet appeared upon the stage of history. But this remark is out of place, for the simple reason that Ezekiel also omits the Japhetic tribes of Ashkenaz and Riphath (Gen 10:3), and still more from the fact that he notices not only the פּרס, or Persians, who were probably related to the מדי, but also the Hamitic peoples Cush and Phut, two African families. Consequently the army of Gog consisted not only of wild Japhetic tribes, who had not yet attained historical importance, but of Hamitic tribes also, that is to say, of peoples living at the extreme north (ירכּתי צפון, Ezek 38:6) and east (Persians) and south (Ethiopians), i.e., on the borders of the then known world. These are all summoned by Gog, and gathered together for an attack upon the people of God. This points to a time when their former foes, Ammon, Moab, Edom, Philistines, and Syrians, and the old imperial powers, Egypt, Asshur, Babel, Javan, will all have passed away from the stage of history, and the people of God will stand in the centre of the historical life of the world, and will have spread so widely over the earth, that its foes will only be found on the borders of the civilised world (compare Rev_ 20:8).
Ezek 38:3-9 contain in general terms the determinate counsel of God concerning Gog. - Ezek 38:3-6. Jehovah is about to mislead Gog to a crusade against His people Israel, and summons him to prepare for the invasion of the restored land of Israel. The announcement of the purpose for which Jehovah will make use of Gog and his army, and the summons addressed to him to make ready, form two strophes, which are clearly marked by the similarity of the conclusion in Ezek 38:6 and Ezek 38:9. - Ezek 38:3. God will deal with Gog, to sanctify Himself upon him by means of judgment (cf. Ezek 38:10). He therefore misleads him to an attack upon the people of Israel. שׁובב, an intensive form from שׁוּב, may signify, as vox media, to cause to return (Ezek 39:27), and to cause to turn away, to lead away from the right road or goal, to lead astray (Is 47:10). Here and in Ezek 39:2 it means to lead or bring away from his previous attitude, i.e., to mislead or seduce, in the sense of enticing to a dangerous enterprise; according to which the Chaldee has rendered it correctly, so far as the actual sense is concerned, אשׁדלנּך, alliciam te. In the words, "I place rings in thy jaws" (cf. Ezek 29:4), Gog is represented as an unmanageable beast, which is compelled to follow its leader (cf. Is 37:29); and the thought is thereby expressed, that Gog is compelled to obey the power of God against his will. הוציא, to lead him away from his land, or natural soil. The passage in Rev_ 20:8, "to deceive the nations (πλανῆσαι τὰ ἔθνη), Gog and Magog, to gather them together to battle," corresponds to these words so far as the material sense is concerned; with this exception, that Satan is mentioned as the seducer of the nations in the Apocalypse, whereas Ezekiel gives prominence to the leading of God, which controls the manifestations even of evil, "so that these two passages stand in the same relation to one another as 2Kings 24:1 and 1Chron 21:1" (Hv.). In Ezek 38:4-6 the army is depicted as one splendidly equipped and very numerous. For לבשׁי מכלול, see the comm. on Ezek 23:12, where the Assyrian satraps are so described. קהל , as in Ezek 17:17. The words buckler and shield are loosely appended in the heat of the discourse, without any logical subordination to what precedes. Besides the defensive arms, the greater and smaller shield, they carried swords as weapons of offence. In the case of the nations in Ezek 38:5, only the shield and helmet are mentioned as their equipment, for the sake of variation, as in Ezek 27:10; and in Ezek 38:6 two other nations of the extreme north with their hosts are added. Gomer: the Cimmerians; and the house of Togarmah: the Armenians (see the comm. on Ezek 27:14). For אגפּים, see the comm. on Ezek 12:14. The description is finally rounded off with עמּים רבּים . In Ezek 38:7, the infin. abs. Niphal הכּון, which occurs nowhere else except in Amos 4:12, is used emphatically in the place of the imperative. The repetition of the same verb, though in the imperative Hiphil, equip, i.e., make ready, sc. everything necessary (cf. Ezek 7:14), also serves to strengthen the thought. Be thou to them למשׁמר, for heed, or watch, i.e., as abstr. pro concr., one who gives heed to them, keeps watch over them (cf. Job 7:12 and Neh 4:3, Neh 4:16), in actual fact their leader.
Ezek 38:8 and Ezek 38:9 indicate for what Gog was to hold himself ready. The first clause reminds so strongly of מרוב ימים in Is 24:22, that the play upon this passage cannot possibly be mistaken; so that Ezekiel uses the words in the same sense as Isaiah, though Hvernick is wrong in supposing that הפּקד is used in the sense of being missed or wanting, i.e., of perishing. The word never has the latter meaning; and to be missed does not suit the context either here or in Isaiah, where יפּקד means to be visited, i.e., brought to punishment. And here also this meaning, visitari (Vulg.), is to be retained, and that in the sense of a penal visitation. The objection raised, namely, that there is no reference to punishment here, but that this is first mentioned in Ezek 38:16 or 18, loses all its force if we bear in mind that visiting is a more general idea than punishing; and the visitation consisted in the fact of God's leading Gog to invade the land of Israel, that He might sanctify Himself upon him by judgment. This might very fittingly be here announced, and it also applies to the parallel clause which follows: thou wilt come into the land, etc., with which the explanation commences of the way in which God would visit him. The only other meaning which could also answer to the parallelism of the clauses, viz., to be commanded, to receive command (Hitzig and Kliefoth), is neither sustained by the usage of the language, nor in accordance with the context. In the passages quoted in support of this, viz., Neh 7:1 and Neh 12:44, נפקד merely signifies to be charged with the oversight of a thing; and it never means only to receive command to do anything. Moreover, Gog has already been appointed leader of the army in v.7, and therefore is not "to be placed in the supreme command" for the first time after many days. מיּמים רבּים, after many days, i.e., after a long time (cf. Josh 23:1), is not indeed equivalent in itself to בּאחרית השּׁנים, but signifies merely the lapse of a lengthened period; yet this is defined here as occurring in the אחרית השּׁנים. - אחרית השּׁנים, equivalent to אחרית היּמים (Ezek 38:16), is the end of days, the last time, not the future generally, but the final future, the Messianic time of the completing of the kingdom of God (see the comm. on Gen 49:1). This meaning is also applicable here. For Gog is to come up to the mountains of Israel, which have been laid waste תּמיד, continually, i.e., for a long time, but are now inhabited again. Although, for example, תּמיד signifies a period of time relatively long, it evidently indicates a longer period than the seventy or fifty years' desolation of the land during the Babylonian captivity; more especially if we take it in connection with the preceding ad following statements, to the effect that Gog will come into the land, which has been brought back from the sword and gathered out of many peoples. These predicates show that in ארץ the idea of the population of the land is the predominant one; for this alone could be gathered out of many nations, and also brought back from the sword, i.e., not from the consequences of the calamity of war, viz., exile (Rosenmller), but restored from being slain and exiled by the sword of the enemy. משׁובבת, passive participle of the Pilel שׁובב, to restore (cf. Is 58:12); not turned away from the sword, i.e., in no expectation of war (Hitzig), which does not answer to the parallel clause, and cannot be sustained by Mic 2:8. מעמּים , gathered out of many peoples, points also beyond the Babylonian captivity to the dispersion of Israel in all the world, which did not take place till the second destruction of Jerusalem, and shows that תּמיד denotes a much longer devastation of the land than the Chaldean devastation was. והיא introduces a circumstantial clause; and היא points back to ארץ, i.e., to the inhabitants of the land. These are now brought out of the nations, i.e., at the time when Gog invades the land, and are dwelling in their own land upon the mountains of Israel in untroubled security. עלה signifies the advance of an enemy, as in Is 7:1, etc. שׁואה, a tempest, as in Prov 1:27, from שׁאה, to roar. The comparison to a cloud is limited to the covering; but this does not alter the signification of the cloud as a figurative representation of severe calamity.
John Gill
38:1 And the word of the Lord came unto me,.... At the same time as the preceding prophecy did, as the copulative and shows; which predicts the restoration and conversion of the Jews; the union of their tribes under the King Messiah; and their settlement in their own land: and this respects some disturbance they should meet with upon it, for a short time, by a powerful enemy hereafter described:
saying; as follows:
John Wesley
38:1 Saying - God now forewarns the Jews, what enemies and troubles would interpose, before he would fully deliver them.
38:138:1: Եւ եղեւ բա՛ն Տեառն առ իս՝ եւ ասէ.
1 Տէրը խօսեց ինձ հետ ու ասաց.
38 Դարձեալ Տէրոջը խօսքը ինծի եղաւ՝ ըսելով.
Եւ եղեւ բան Տեառն առ իս եւ ասէ:

38:1: Եւ եղեւ բա՛ն Տեառն առ իս՝ եւ ասէ.
1 Տէրը խօսեց ինձ հետ ու ասաց.
38 Դարձեալ Տէրոջը խօսքը ինծի եղաւ՝ ըսելով.
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:138:1 И было ко мне слово Господне:
38:2 υἱὲ υιος son ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human στήρισον στηριζω steady; steadfast τὸ ο the πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of σου σου of you; your ἐπὶ επι in; on Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τοῦ ο the Μαγωγ μαγωγ Magōg; Magog ἄρχοντα αρχων ruling; ruler Ρως ρως and; even Θοβελ θοβελ and; even προφήτευσον προφητευω prophesy ἐπ᾿ επι in; on αὐτὸν αυτος he; him
38:2 בֶּן־ ben- בֵּן son אָדָ֗ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind שִׂ֤ים śˈîm שׂים put פָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ pānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to גֹּוג֙ gôḡ גֹּוג Gog אֶ֣רֶץ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth הַ ha הַ the מָּגֹ֔וג mmāḡˈôḡ מָגֹוג Magog נְשִׂ֕יא nᵊśˈî נָשִׂיא chief רֹ֖אשׁ rˌōš רֹאשׁ head מֶ֣שֶׁךְ mˈešeḵ מֶשֶׁךְ Meshech וְ wᵊ וְ and תֻבָ֑ל ṯuvˈāl תֻּבַל Tubal וְ wᵊ וְ and הִנָּבֵ֖א hinnāvˌē נבא speak as prophet עָלָֽיו׃ ʕālˈāʸw עַל upon
38:2. fili hominis pone faciem tuam contra Gog terram Magog principem capitis Mosoch et Thubal et vaticinare de eoSon of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Mosoch and Thubal: and prophesy of him,
2. Son of man, set thy face toward Gog, of the land of Magog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, and prophesy against him,
And the word of the LORD came unto me, saying:

38:1 И было ко мне слово Господне:
38:2
υἱὲ υιος son
ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human
στήρισον στηριζω steady; steadfast
τὸ ο the
πρόσωπόν προσωπον face; ahead of
σου σου of you; your
ἐπὶ επι in; on
Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog
καὶ και and; even
τὴν ο the
γῆν γη earth; land
τοῦ ο the
Μαγωγ μαγωγ Magōg; Magog
ἄρχοντα αρχων ruling; ruler
Ρως ρως and; even
Θοβελ θοβελ and; even
προφήτευσον προφητευω prophesy
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
αὐτὸν αυτος he; him
38:2
בֶּן־ ben- בֵּן son
אָדָ֗ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind
שִׂ֤ים śˈîm שׂים put
פָּנֶ֨יךָ֙ pānˈeʸḵā פָּנֶה face
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
גֹּוג֙ gôḡ גֹּוג Gog
אֶ֣רֶץ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth
הַ ha הַ the
מָּגֹ֔וג mmāḡˈôḡ מָגֹוג Magog
נְשִׂ֕יא nᵊśˈî נָשִׂיא chief
רֹ֖אשׁ rˌōš רֹאשׁ head
מֶ֣שֶׁךְ mˈešeḵ מֶשֶׁךְ Meshech
וְ wᵊ וְ and
תֻבָ֑ל ṯuvˈāl תֻּבַל Tubal
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הִנָּבֵ֖א hinnāvˌē נבא speak as prophet
עָלָֽיו׃ ʕālˈāʸw עַל upon
38:2. fili hominis pone faciem tuam contra Gog terram Magog principem capitis Mosoch et Thubal et vaticinare de eo
Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Mosoch and Thubal: and prophesy of him,
2. Son of man, set thy face toward Gog, of the land of Magog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, and prophesy against him,
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
2. Гог здесь является лицом, князем из земля Магог, но в Откр XX:8: это имя, как и Магог - названия народов. Частица ма в санскритском языке заключает идею земли и поставленная пред именем Гога может значить земля Гога. Имя Гог могло быть таким же образованием из Магог, как арабское Ягуг из Магд, Магу, Маги (персы). Следовательно, ближайшее определение таинственного имени “Гог” зависит от значения более известного имени “Магог”. Член, поставленный здесь при Магог, дает понять, что это известный народ и отсылает к Быт X:2, единственному месту Ветхова Завета, где назван этот народ (= 1: Пар I:5). По этому месту Магог - 2-ой сын Иафета: Гомер, Магог, Мадай, Иаван (Елисса), Фувал, Мешех и Фирас. Из этих имен следующие за Магогом нашли себе очень вероятные отожествления: Мадай - Мидяне, Иаван - греки и т. д. По Иосифу Флавт (Autiqu, I, 6, 1) и др. Магог означает скифов. Но скифы, которые во времена Иосии напали на Переднюю Азию, называются у Иезекииля ХХХII:26, по-видимому, Мешех и Фувал, а здесь народы с последними двумя именами подчинены Гогу и, по-видимому, с недавнего времени. Вероятно, Гог проник с севера. И X гл. Бытия указывает для земли Магог страну к северу от Кавказа, потому что, по всей вероятности, там жил народ “Гомер”. Если здесь Гог представляется живущим в стране Магог и выступает как князь Мешеха и Фувала, то из этого не следует еще, что земли Магог нужно искать поблизости к этим последним народам. Против этого говорит Быт X:2, помещающая между Магогом и Мешехом ряд имен. Мешех и Фувал, очевидно, являются завоеваниями Гога. По всему этому имени Магог не отвечают ни Массагеты, которые во времена Геродота жили между Каспийским и Аральским морями и в Киргизских степях, ни Армения, которая еще при ахеменидах образовала особую сатрапию и была населена главным образом скифскими пастушескими племенами. Еще менее годится для определения земли Магог так называемая скифская стена, которая тянулась от Дербента на Каспийском море до Понта Евксинского и у арабов называлась созвучным с Магог именем. Если так трудно сказать что-нибудь определенное о значении имени Магог и месте этой страны или народа, несмотря на то, что Ветхий Завет, по-видимому, соединял с этим именем определенное и известное всем представление, то тем труднее сказать что-нибудь об имени Гог, употребляемом только Иезекиилем (Впрочем оно встречается еще в 1: Пар V:4: как имя одного потомка Рувимова, о котором ничего не сообщается). Имя сопоставляли с тюркским г¨г, небо, персид. ког, гора; путешественники XIII в. называют князя татарского кот-хан; титул князя во многих, языках звучит так: kuk, khon, king, konig; ср. наше государь, гой ты, изгой. В клинообразной надписи Ассурбанипала рядом с Биригуди князем Мадая, т. е. мидян, названы Сарити и Паризи, сыновья Гааги, князя Сака (скифов?): может быть, этот, последний тоже, что Гуту, = Gyges, лидийский царь, (Del Wo 1. d. Par. 246). В Тот-Амарнской надписи (Schrad. Keilinchr Bibl. V, 5) Гагая - название каких-то северных варваров. Сопоставляют с именем, Гога и Антиоха Епифана: (Ant) ioch (us) и 'WgugoV'a. - У Иезекииля впервые употреблено это страшное своей новизной и поражающее краткостью и энергией имя, причем, он, может быть, сопоставил его с созвучным именем Магог, одним из самых, северных народов чтобы обозначить этим редким и малознакомым именем всех новых врагов Израиля отдаленного будущего, которые появятся с самых отдаленных частей всегда враждебного иудеям севера, откуда надвинулась на них и последняя катастрофа - плен (ср. I:4; Иер I:14), откуда вышли и все враги Израиля (Ассирия, скифы, Вавилон, персы) - и, появившись оттуда, получит c юга сильные вспомогательные войска (ст. 5), благодаря чему как бы весь мир обрушится на Израиля. - “Князя”, евр. наси, т. е. далее перечисленных народов, которые должно быть, как покоренные, были более подчинены Гогу, чем его родной народ Магог. “Рош” по евр. “голова”, “главный”, почему это, может быть, определение к наси: “главный князь”, как первосвященник звался коген рога, “священник главный”; так действительно Вульг.: princeps capitis. Но LХХ и все другие древние переводы считают Рош собственным именем, следовательно, именем народа. Библия не знает такого народа. Сопоставляют с ним oi RwV византийских и восточных писателей X в. (ср. Рас Коран XXV, 50), называющих так скифский горный народ, у арктического Тавра или у Черного моря и Волги, т.о., очевидно, нас русских; против такого отожествления (Гезениус) Генгстенберг заметил (будем признательны ему), что “русские не могут быть помещены между врагами царства Божия”. Сопоставляют также с Roxolani Плиния (Hist. nat IV, 12) и Птоломея (III, 5) = Rhos + Alani и Раси клинообразных надписей, которых нужно искать на западной границе Елама у Тигра (Del. W. 1. d. Par. 322. Schr. Keil. u. А. Т., 427). Во всяком случае тоже народ отдаленнейшего севера и страшный своею неизвестностью, “Мешех” и “Фувал” - см. объяснение XXVII:13, ср. XXXII:26. Мешех и в Пс СXIX:4: (Мосох = в рус. Библии) образ безжалостного варварского народа.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
1 And the word of the LORD came unto me, saying, 2 Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal, and prophesy against him, 3 And say, Thus saith the Lord GOD; Behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: 4 And I will turn thee back, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts of armour, even a great company with bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords: 5 Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet: 6 Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his bands: and many people with thee. 7 Be thou prepared, and prepare for thyself, thou, and all thy company that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto them. 8 After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, and is gathered out of many people, against the mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them. 9 Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee. 10 Thus saith the Lord GOD; It shall also come to pass, that at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought: 11 And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates, 12 To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited, and upon the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land. 13 Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art thou come to take a spoil? hast thou gathered thy company to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil?
The critical expositors have enough to do here to enquire out Gog and Magog. We cannot pretend either to add to their observations or to determine their controversies. Gog seems to be the king and Magog the kingdom; so that Gog and Magog are like Pharaoh and the Egyptians. Some think they find them afar off, in Scythia, Tartary, and Russia. Others think they find them nearer the land of Israel, in Syria, and Asia the Less. Ezekiel is appointed to prophesy against Gog, and to tell him that God is against him, v. 2, 3. Note, God does not only see those that are now the enemies of his church and set himself against them, but he foresees those that will be so and lets them know by his word that he is against them too, and yet is pleased to make use of them to serve his own purposes, for the glory of his own name; surely their wrath shall praise him, and the remainder thereof he will restrain, Ps. lxxvi. 10. Let us observe here,
I. The confusion which God designed to put this enemy to. It is remarkable that this is put first in the prophecy; before it is foretold that God will bring him forth against Israel it is foretold that God will put hooks into his jaws and turn him back (v. 4), that they might have assurance of their deliverance before they had the prospect given them of their danger. Thus tender is God of the comfort of his people, thus careful that they may not be frightened; even before the trouble begins he tells them it will end well.
II. The undertaking which he designed to engage him in, in order to this defeat and disappointment. 1. The nations that shall be confederate in this enterprise against Israel are many, and great, and mighty (v. 5, 6), Persia, Ethiopia, &c. Antiochus had an army made up of all the nations here named, and many others. These people had been at variance with one another, and yet in combination against Israel. How are those increased that trouble God's people! 2. They are well furnished with arms and ammunition, and bring a good train of artillery into the field--horses and horsemen (v. 4) bravely equipped with all sorts of armour, bucklers and shields for defence, and all handling swords for offence. Orders are given to make all imaginable preparation for this expedition (v. 7): "Be thou prepared, and do thou prepare. See what warlike preparations thou hast already in store, and, lest that should not suffice, make further preparation, thou and all thy company," Let Gog himself be a guard to the rest of the confederates. As commander-in-chief, let him engage to take care of them and their safety; let him pass his word for their security, and take them under his particular protection. The leaders of an army, instead of exposing their soldiers needlessly and presumptuously, and throwing away their lives upon desperate undertakings, should study to be a guard to them, and, whenever they send them forth in danger, should contrive to support and cover them. This call to prepare seems to be ironical--Do thy worst, but I will turn thee back; like that Isa. viii. 9. Gird yourselves, and you shall be broken in pieces. 3. Their design is against the mountains of Israel (v. 8), against the land that is brought back from the sword. It is not long since it was harassed with the sword of war, and it has been always wasted, more or less, with one judgment or other; it is but newly gathered out of many people, and brought forth out of the nations; it has enjoyed comparatively but a short breathing-time, has scarcely recovered any strength since it was brought down by war and captivity; and therefore its neighbours need not fear its being too great, nay, and therefore it is very barbarous to pick a quarrel with it so soon. It is a people that dwell safely, all of them, in unwalled villages, very secure, and having neither bars nor gates, v. 11. It is a certain sign that they intend no mischief to their neighbours, for they fear no mischief from them. It cannot be thought that those will offend others who do not take care to defend themselves; and this aggravates the sin of these invaders. It is base and barbarous to devise evil against thy neighbour while he dwells securely by thee, and has no distrust of thee, Prov. iii. 29. But see here how the clouds return after the rain in this world, and what little reason we have ever to be secure till we come to heaven. It is not long since Israel was brought back from the sword of one enemy, and behold the sword of another is drawn against it. Former troubles will not excuse us from further troubles; but when we think we have put off the harness, at least for some time, by a fresh and sudden alarm we may be called to gird it on again; and therefore we must never boast nor be off our guard. 4. That which the enemy has in view, in forming this project, is to enrich himself and to make himself master, not of the country, but of the wealth of it, to spoil and plunder it, and make a prey of it: At the same time that God intends to bring this matter about things shall come into the mind of this enemy, and he shall think an evil thought, v. 10. Note, All the mischief men do, and particularly the mischief they do to the church of God, arises from evil thoughts that come into their mind, ambitious thoughts, covetous thoughts, spiteful thoughts against those that are good, for the sake of their goodness. It came into Antiochus's mind what a singular people these religious Jews were, and how their worship witnessed against and condemned the idolatries of their neighbours, and therefore, in enmity to their religion, he would plague them. It came into his mind what a wealthy people they were, that they had gotten cattle and goods in the midst of the land (v. 12), and withal how weak they were, how unable to make any resistance, how easy it would be to carry off what they had, and how much glory this rapine would add to his victorious sword; these things coming into his mind, and one evil thought drawing on another, he came at last to this resolve (v. 11, 12): "I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; yea, that I will; it will cost me nothing to make them all my own. I will go and disturb those that are at rest, without giving them any notice, not to crush their growing greatness, or chastise their insolence, or make reprisals upon them for any wrong they have done us (they had none of these pretences to make war upon them), but purely to take a spoil and to take a prey" (v. 12), in open defiance to all the laws of justice and equity, as much as the highwayman's killing the traveller that he may take his money. These were the thoughts that came into the mind of this wicked prince, and God knew them; nay, he knew them before they came into his mind, for he understands our thoughts afar off, Ps. cxxxix. 2. 5. According to the project thus formed he pours in all his forces upon the land of Israel, and finds those that are ready to come in to his assistance with the same prospects (v. 9): "Thou shalt ascent and come like a storm, with all the force, and fury, and fierceness imaginable, and thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, to darken it, and to threaten it, thou and not only all thy bands, all the force thou canst bring into the field, but many people with thee" (such as are spoken of v. 13), "Sheba and Dedan, the Arabians and the Edomites, and the merchants of Tarshish, of Tyre and Sidon and other maritime cities, they and their young lions that are greedy of spoil and live upon it, shall say, Hast thou come to take the spoil of this land?" Yes he has; and therefore they wish him success. Or perhaps they envy him, or grudge it to him. "Hast thou come for riches who art thyself so rich already?" Or, knowing that God was on Israel's side, they thus ridicule his attempts, foreseeing that they would be baffled and that he would be disappointed of the prey he promised himself. Or, if he come to take the prey, they will come and join with him, and add to his forces. When Lysias, who was general of Antiochus's army, came against the Jews, the neighbouring nations joined with him (1 Mac. iii. 41), to share in the guilt, in hopes to share in the prey. When thou sawest a thief then thou consentedst with him.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:2: Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog - This is allowed to be the most difficult prophecy in the Old Testament. It is difficult to us, because we know not the king nor people intended by it: but I am satisfied they were well known by these names in the time that the prophet wrote.
I have already remarked in the introduction to this book that there are but two opinions on this subject that appear to be at all probable:
1. That which makes Gog Cambyses, king of Persia; and,
2. That which makes him Antiochus Epiphanes, king of Syria.
And between these two (for one or other is supposed to be the person intended) men are much divided.
Calmet, one of the most judicious commentators that ever wrote on the Bible, declares for Cambyses; and supports his opinion, in opposition to all others, by many arguments.
Mr. Mede supposes the Americans are meant who were originally colonies of the Scythians who were descendants of Magog, son of Japheth. Houbigant declares for the Scythians, whose neighbors were the people of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal, that is the Russians, Muscovites, and Tybareni or Cappadocians. Several eminent critics espouse this opinion. Rabbi David Kimchi says the Christians and Turks are meant: and of later opinions there are several, founded in the ocean of conjecture. Calmet says expressly, that Gog is Cambyses, king of Persia, who on his return from the land of Egypt, died in Judea. The Revelation David Martin, pastor of the Waloon church at Utrecht, concludes, after examining all previous opinions, that Antiochus Epiphanes, the great enemy on the Israelites, is alone intended here; and that Gog, which signifies covered, is an allusion to the well-known character of Antiochus, whom historians describe as an artful, cunning, and dissembling man. See Dan 8:23, Dan 8:25; Dan 11:23, Dan 11:27, Dan 11:32. Magog he supposes to mean the country of Syria. Of this opinion the following quotation from Pliny, Hist. Nat., lib. v., c. 23, seems a proof; who, speaking of Coele-Syria, says Coele habet Apamiam Marsyia amne divisam a Nazarinorum Tetrarchia. Bambycem quam alio nomine Hierapolis vocatur, Syris vero Magog. "Coele-Syria has Apamia separated from the tetrarchy of the Nazarenes by the river Marsyia; and Bambyce, otherwise called Hierapolis; but by the Syrians, Magog."
I shall at present examine the text by this latter opinion.
Chief prince of Meshech and Tubal - These probably mean the auxiliary forces, over whom Antiochus was supreme; they were the Muscovites and Cappadocians.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:2: Gog ... - Gog of the land of Magog, prince of Rosh, Meshech and Tubal. "Gog" is here the name of a captain from "the land of Magog" (compare Gen 10:2) the name of a people of the north, placed between "Gomer" (the Cimmerians) and "Madai" (the Medes). In the History of Assurbanipal from cuneiform inscriptions, a chief of the Saka (Scythians), called Ga-a-gi, is identified by some with Gog. Rosh, if a proper name, occurs in this connection only.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:2: Son: Eze 2:1, Eze 39:1
set: Eze 6:2, Eze 20:46, Eze 25:2, Eze 35:2, Eze 35:3
Gog: Rather, "Gog (the prince) of the land of Magog, the prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal." By Magog is most probably meant the Scythians or Tartars, called so by Arabian and Syrian writers, and especially the Turks, who were originally natives of Tartary; and by Rosh, the Russians, descendants of the ancient inhabitants on the river Araxes or Rosh. Rev 20:8, Rev 20:9
Magog: Gen 10:2; Ch1 1:5
the chief prince of: or, prince of the chief of
Meshech: Eze 27:13, Eze 32:26; Isa 66:19
Geneva 1599
38:2 Son of man, set thy face against (a) Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal, and prophesy against him,
(a) Who were a people that came from Magog the son of Japheth, (Gen 10:2). Magog also here signifies a certain country so that by these two countries which had the government of Greece and Italy he means the principal enemies of the Church, (Rev_ 20:8).
John Gill
38:2 Son of man, set thy face against Gog,.... Of the phrase, "setting the face towards", or "against"; see Gill on Ezek 6:2, Ezek 21:2, Ezek 25:2 but who this Gog is the prophet is bid boldly to face, and intrepidly declare the wrath of God against, interpreters are divided about. Calmet (m) thinks that Cambyses and his army are meant by Gog and Magog, which to mention is enough; and it is the opinion of St. Ambrose (n) that the Goths who ravaged the Roman empire in the fifth and sixth ages are meant: others, who suppose this prophecy was fulfilled after the Jews' return from the Babylonish captivity, and before the coming of Christ, take Gog to be a common name of the kings of the lesser Asia and Syria, or the Seleucidae, who distressed the Jews in the times of the Maccabees; the chief of whom was Antiochus Epiphanes, who is supposed, to be more especially designed, and was a type of antichrist; and they are the more strengthened in this opinion, because they find, in Pliny (o), that the city of Hierapolis in Syria was called by the Syrians Magog; and they fancy the name of Gog is the same with Gyges a king of Lydia, whose country was called from him Gygea, or Gog's land, who was grandfather to Croesus; and which country came into the hands of Cyrus, and from the Persians into the hands of the Greeks, and so to the Seleucidae; for which reason they may bear this name in this prophecy; but it is certain that the prophecy refers to what should be in "latter years", and in the "latter days", Ezek 38:8, phrases which respect the times of the Messiah, the Gospel dispensation, and oftentimes the latter part of that; and even those times when the Jews shall return to their own land, and continue in it for ever, as the preceding prophecy, with which this is connected, shows; and so the Jews always understand it of an enemy of theirs yet to come. Cocceius is of opinion, that the Romish antichrist is meant; and that Gog signifying the covering or roof of a house, fitly points him out; who puts himself between God and man, as the roof is between heaven and earth; and who keeps out the light of divine things, the heat of love, and rain of spiritual blessings, from the church; and compares with this the veil over all nations, Is 25:7 and the covering cherub, Ezek 28:14, but I rather think the Turk is here meant, the eastern antichrist, in whose possession the land of Judea now is; and which, when recovered by the Jews, will greatly exasperate him, and he will gather all his forces together to regain it, but in vain. The learned Vitringa (p), though he is of opinion that this prophecy, according to its first and proper sense, respects the kings of Syria, the persecutors of the church, that should bring large and well disciplined armies into the land of the people of God, gathered out of the northern nations, and Scythians, and would be defeated in the land of Canaan; yet mystically intends the Turks, the Scythian nation and northern people, who, by a like attempt, will infest the church of the people of God, and invade their country; and this he makes no doubt of is the proper aspect of Gog and Magog: and Samuel Dauderstat, a Lutheran divine, has wrote a dissertation, "De Antichristo Orientali", concerning the eastern antichrist, which he explains of Gog and Magog: and Michael Buckenroder, another Lutheran, has written upon the irruption to be made by Gog and Magog into the mountains of Israel (q). Osiander thus explains the several names mentioned; by Gog I think the Turk is meant, by Magog the Tartarian, by Meshec the Muscovites, and by Tubal the Wallachians; and Starckius on the place observes, that if this prophecy is yet to be fulfilled, we shall easily find our Gog, and point out his metropolis Constantinople; so that I am not singular in my opinion. Gog signifies "high" (r) and eminent, one in a very exalted station: it comes from the same root, and has the same signification, as Agag, to whose height and exaltation there is an allusion in Num 24:7, where the Samaritan and Septuagint versions read Gog: it is the same with, "Jagog", by which name the Arabians called the Scythians that lived far east, particularly those that were situated to the north of China beyond Imaus, as Golius (s) observes; and Josephus (t) says that the posterity of Magog are called Scythians, and these inhabited Tartary; and there, as Paulus Venetus (u) affirms, are the countries of Gog and Magog, which they call Gug and Mungug now; from hence came the Turks, even from Tartary, which is called by the eastern writers Turchestan, whence they had their name; and so may with great propriety be called by the name of Gog; their emperor also being a high and mighty one, whose empire must be destroyed; and which is signified by the passing away of the second woe, and the drying up of the river Euphrates, Rev_ 11:14, upon which passages this and the following chapter may be thought a good commentary: and so the Jews (w) make Gog to be the general of the Ishmaelites or Turks, as Armillus of the Christians, and who shall reign in the kingdom of Magog or Scythia. Gog is the name of a man, 1Chron 5:4, as it is here, and not of a country. The country of Gog is called, as follows,
the land of Magog, of which Gog is king, as Jarchi and Kimchi interpret it: it may be supplied in connection with the former clause,
set thy face against Gog, in the land of Magog; or, "against Gog", against "the land of Magog", so Kimchi. The countries of Jagog and Magog, according to the Arabic geographer (x), are surrounded by Mount Caucasus, which Bochart (y) conjectures has its name from thence; it being in the Semi-Chaldee language, the language of the Colchi and Armenians, "Gog-hasan", or Gog's fortress. This land of Magog is the same with Cathaia or Scythia, that part of Tartary from whence the Turks came; and which perhaps may come into their hands again before this prophecy is fulfilled; and even now the Turk calls himself king of Tartary; and the Magog of Pliny in Syria, the same with Aleppo, is in his dominions; which Maimonides (z) also takes notice of as in Syria, though he seems to distinguish it from Haleb or Aleppo; however, according to him, they were near to one another; though some (a) think the place in Pliny is corrupted, and that it ought to be read Magog, as it is, by Maimonides, Magbab. Gog is further described as
the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal: some render it, "prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal"; taking Rosh, as the rest, for the name of a place, a part of Scythia, from whence the Russians came, and had their name. So it is rendered by the Septuagint, Symmachus, and Theodotion; and some later Greek writers (b) make mention of a country called Ros, which, they say, is a Scythian nation, situated between the Euxine Pontus and the whole maritime coast to the north of Taurus, a people fierce and wild. Meshech and Tubal were the brethren of Magog, and sons of Japheth, Gen 10:2, whose posterity inhabited those counties called after their name; who, according to Josephus (c), are the Cappadocians and Iberians; and among the former is a place called Mazaca, which has some affinity with Meshech; and there was a country called Gogarene (d), a part of Iberia. According to Bochart (e), these are the Moschi and Tybarenes, people that dwell near the Euxine sea, and under the dominion of the Turk; wherefore the Grand Turk may be called the chief prince of them:
and prophesy against him: foretell his ruin and destruction, which is hinted before. Mention is made of his invasion of the land of Judea, and that for the comfort of the Jews, that they might have nothing to fear from this formidable army.
(m) Dictionary in the words "Gog" and "Magog". (n) "De fide ad Gratianum", l. 2. sect. 4. col. 144. tom. 4. (o) Nat. Hist. l. 5. c. 23. (p) Comment. in Jesaiam, vol. 1. p. 954. (q) Vid. Calmet. Bibliotheca Sacra, art. 67. p. 442. (r) Hiller. Ononmastic. Sacr. p. 67, 406, 477. (s) Lexic. Arabic in Rad. col. 26. (t) Antiqu. l. 1. c. 6. sect. 1. (u) Apud Schindler. Lex. Polyglott. col. 288. And Harris's Voyages and Travels, vol. 1. p. 604. (w) Vid. Huls. Theolog. Jud. par. 2. p. 511. (x) Geograph. Arab. par. 9. clim. 5. lin. 22, 23. (y) Phaleg. l. 3. c. 13. col. 187. (z) Hilchot Terumot, c. 1. sect. 9. (a) See Hyde Not, in Peritsol. Itinera Mundi, p. 42. (b) Zonaras, Cedrenus, & Joan. Curopalates apud Selden. de Synedriis, l. 2. c. 3. sect. 6. (c) Antiqu. l. 1. c. 6. sect. 1. (d) Strabo. Geograph. l. 11. p. 364. (e) Phaleg. l. 3. c. 13. col. 188.
John Wesley
38:2 Gog - This cannot be one single person, or prince, though perhaps it points out some one, by whom the troubles foretold were begun. Some believe the time is still to come, wherein this prophecy is to be fulfilled. And that it must intend those enemies of God's church who descended from the Scythians, and are now masters of Cappadocia, Iberia, Armenia, or are in confederacy with the Tartars, and those northern heathens. But others think, all the enemies of Israel in all quarters, both open and secret are here intended, and that the Antichristian forces and combination, are what the prophet foretells. Magog - Magog is, at least, part of Scythia, and comprehends Syria, in which was Hierapolis. taken by the Scythians, and called of them Scythopolis. It is that country, which now is in subjection to the Turks, and may be extended thro' Asia minor, the countries of Sarmatia, and many others, under more than one in succession of time. And in the last time under some one active and daring prince, all their power will be stirred up against Christians.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:2 THE ASSAULT OF GOG, AND GOD'S JUDGMENT ON HIM. (Eze. 38:1-23)
Gog--the prince of the land of Magog. The title was probably a common one of the kings of the country, as "Pharaoh" in Egypt. Chakan was the name given by the Northern Asiatics to their king, and is still a title of the Turkish sultan: "Gog" may be a contraction of this. In Ezekiel's time a horde of northern Asiatics, termed by the Greeks "Scythians," and probably including the Moschi and Tibareni, near the Caucasus, here ("Meshech . . . Tubal") undertook an expedition against Egypt [HERODOTUS, 1.103-106]. These names might be adopted by Ezekiel from the historical fact familiar to men at the time, as ideal titles for the great last anti-Christian confederacy.
Magog-- (Gen 10:2; 1Chron 1:5). The name of a land belonging to Japheth's posterity. Maha, in Sanskrit, means "land." Gog is the ideal political head of the region. In Rev_ 20:8, Gog and Magog are two peoples.
the chief prince--rather, "prince of Rosh," or "Rhos" [Septuagint]. The Scythian Tauri in the Crimea were so called. The Araxes also was called "Rhos." The modern Russians may have hence assumed their name, as Moscow and Tobolsk from Meshech and Tubal, though their proper ancient name was Slavi, or Wends. HENGSTENBERG supports English Version, as "Rosh" is not found in the Bible. "Magog was Gog's original kingdom, though he acquired also Meshech and Tubal, so as to be called their chief prince."
38:238:2: Որդի մարդոյ՝ հաստատեա՛ զերեսս քո ՚ի վերայ Գովգայ, եւ երկրին Մագովգայ, իշխանին Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թոբելայ. եւ մարգարեա՛ ՚ի վերայ նորա[12904], [12904] Բազումք. Մարգարէա՛ց ՚ի վերայ նորա։
2 «Մարդո՛ւ որդի, երեսդ ուղղի՛ր Գոգի եւ Ռոսմեսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխան Մագոգի երկրի դէմ եւ մարգարէացի՛ր նրա մասին, ասա՛ նրան.
2 «Որդի՛ մարդոյ, երեսդ դէպի Մագոգի երկիրը եղող Ռովսի, Մոսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխանին՝ Գոգին դարձուր եւ անոր վրայով մարգարէութիւն ըրէ՛
Որդի մարդոյ, հաստատեա զերեսս քո ի վերայ Գովգայ, երկրին Մագովգայ, իշխանին [817]Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թոբելայ, եւ մարգարեաց ի վերայ նորա:

38:2: Որդի մարդոյ՝ հաստատեա՛ զերեսս քո ՚ի վերայ Գովգայ, եւ երկրին Մագովգայ, իշխանին Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թոբելայ. եւ մարգարեա՛ ՚ի վերայ նորա[12904],
[12904] Բազումք. Մարգարէա՛ց ՚ի վերայ նորա։
2 «Մարդո՛ւ որդի, երեսդ ուղղի՛ր Գոգի եւ Ռոսմեսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխան Մագոգի երկրի դէմ եւ մարգարէացի՛ր նրա մասին, ասա՛ նրան.
2 «Որդի՛ մարդոյ, երեսդ դէպի Մագոգի երկիրը եղող Ռովսի, Մոսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխանին՝ Գոգին դարձուր եւ անոր վրայով մարգարէութիւն ըրէ՛
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:238:2 сын человеческий! обрати лице твое к Гогу в земле Магог, князю Роша, Мешеха и Фувала, и изреки на него пророчество
38:3 καὶ και and; even εἰπὸν επω say; speak αὐτῷ αυτος he; him τάδε οδε further; this λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master κύριος κυριος lord; master ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am ἐγὼ εγω I ἐπὶ επι in; on σὲ σε.1 you Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog ἄρχοντα αρχων ruling; ruler Ρως ρως and; even Θοβελ θοβελ Thobel; Thovel
38:3 וְ wᵊ וְ and אָ֣מַרְתָּ֔ ʔˈāmartˈā אמר say כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH הִנְנִ֤י hinnˈî הִנֵּה behold אֵלֶ֨יךָ֙ ʔēlˈeʸḵā אֶל to גֹּ֔וג gˈôḡ גֹּוג Gog נְשִׂ֕יא nᵊśˈî נָשִׂיא chief רֹ֖אשׁ rˌōš רֹאשׁ head מֶ֥שֶׁךְ mˌešeḵ מֶשֶׁךְ Meshech וְ wᵊ וְ and תֻבָֽל׃ ṯuvˈāl תֻּבַל Tubal
38:3. et dices ad eum haec dicit Dominus Deus ecce ego ad te Gog principem capitis Mosoch et ThubalAnd say to him: Thus saith the Lord God: Behold, I come against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Mosoch and Thubal.
3. and say, Thus saith the Lord GOD: Behold, I am against thee, O Gog, prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal:
Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal, and prophesy against him:

38:2 сын человеческий! обрати лице твое к Гогу в земле Магог, князю Роша, Мешеха и Фувала, и изреки на него пророчество
38:3
καὶ και and; even
εἰπὸν επω say; speak
αὐτῷ αυτος he; him
τάδε οδε further; this
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
κύριος κυριος lord; master
ἰδοὺ ιδου see!; here I am
ἐγὼ εγω I
ἐπὶ επι in; on
σὲ σε.1 you
Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog
ἄρχοντα αρχων ruling; ruler
Ρως ρως and; even
Θοβελ θοβελ Thobel; Thovel
38:3
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אָ֣מַרְתָּ֔ ʔˈāmartˈā אמר say
כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus
אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
הִנְנִ֤י hinnˈî הִנֵּה behold
אֵלֶ֨יךָ֙ ʔēlˈeʸḵā אֶל to
גֹּ֔וג gˈôḡ גֹּוג Gog
נְשִׂ֕יא nᵊśˈî נָשִׂיא chief
רֹ֖אשׁ rˌōš רֹאשׁ head
מֶ֥שֶׁךְ mˌešeḵ מֶשֶׁךְ Meshech
וְ wᵊ וְ and
תֻבָֽל׃ ṯuvˈāl תֻּבַל Tubal
38:3. et dices ad eum haec dicit Dominus Deus ecce ego ad te Gog principem capitis Mosoch et Thubal
And say to him: Thus saith the Lord God: Behold, I come against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Mosoch and Thubal.
3. and say, Thus saith the Lord GOD: Behold, I am against thee, O Gog, prince of Rosh, Meshech, and Tubal:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:3: I am: Eze 13:8, Eze 29:3, Eze 35:3, Eze 39:1, Eze 39:2-10
John Gill
38:3 And say, thus saith the Lord God, behold, I am against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal. Which is repeated for the confirmation of it, that so it would certainly be; that the Lord, the mighty God, and King of kings, would in his providence frown upon him, and appear against him; and his titles are repeated also, to show that all his greatness, grandeur, and power, would not protect him from the vengeance of God.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:3 His high-sounding titles are repeated to imply the haughty self-confidence of the invader as if invincible.
38:338:3: եւ ասասցես ցնա. Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ահաւասիկ ես ՚ի վերայ քո իշխանդ Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թովբելայ.
3 “Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. ահա ես քո դէմ եմ, ո՛վ իշխանդ Ռոսմեսոքի ու Թոբէլի,
3 Ու ըսէ՛, Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Ահա ես քեզի դէմ եմ, ո՛վ Գոգ՝ Ռովսի, Մոսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխան։
եւ ասասցես [818]ցնա. Այսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ահաւասիկ ես ի վերայ քո, [819]իշխանդ Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թոբելայ:

38:3: եւ ասասցես ցնա. Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ահաւասիկ ես ՚ի վերայ քո իշխանդ Ռովսմեսովքայ եւ Թովբելայ.
3 “Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. ահա ես քո դէմ եմ, ո՛վ իշխանդ Ռոսմեսոքի ու Թոբէլի,
3 Ու ըսէ՛, Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Ահա ես քեզի դէմ եմ, ո՛վ Գոգ՝ Ռովսի, Մոսոքի ու Թոբէլի իշխան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:338:3 и скажи: так говорит Господь Бог: вот, Я на тебя, Гог, князь Роша, Мешеха и Фувала!
38:4 καὶ και and; even συνάξω συναγω gather σε σε.1 you καὶ και and; even πᾶσαν πας all; every τὴν ο the δύναμίν δυναμις power; ability σου σου of you; your ἵππους ιππος horse καὶ και and; even ἱππεῖς ιππευς cavalry; rider ἐνδεδυμένους ενδυω dress in; wear θώρακας θωραξ breastplate πάντας πας all; every συναγωγὴ συναγωγη gathering πολλή πολυς much; many πέλται πελτη and; even περικεφαλαῖαι περικεφαλαια helmet καὶ και and; even μάχαιραι μαχαιρα short sword
38:4 וְ wᵊ וְ and שֹׁ֣ובַבְתִּ֔יךָ šˈôvavtˈîḵā שׁוב return וְ wᵊ וְ and נָתַתִּ֥י nāṯattˌî נתן give חַחִ֖ים ḥaḥˌîm חָח thorn בִּ bi בְּ in לְחָיֶ֑יךָ lᵊḥāyˈeʸḵā לְחִי jaw וְ wᵊ וְ and הֹוצֵאתִי֩ hôṣēṯˌî יצא go out אֹותְךָ֙ ʔôṯᵊḵˌā אֵת [object marker] וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole חֵילֶ֜ךָ ḥêlˈeḵā חַיִל power סוּסִ֣ים sûsˈîm סוּס horse וּ û וְ and פָרָשִׁ֗ים fārāšˈîm פָּרָשׁ horseman לְבֻשֵׁ֤י lᵊvušˈê לָבוּשׁ clad מִכְלֹול֙ miḵlôl מִכְלֹול perfection כֻּלָּ֔ם kullˈām כֹּל whole קָהָ֥ל qāhˌāl קָהָל assembly רָב֙ rˌāv רַב much צִנָּ֣ה ṣinnˈā צִנָּה shield וּ û וְ and מָגֵ֔ן māḡˈēn מָגֵן shield תֹּפְשֵׂ֥י tōfᵊśˌê תפשׂ seize חֲרָבֹ֖ות ḥᵃrāvˌôṯ חֶרֶב dagger כֻּלָּֽם׃ kullˈām כֹּל whole
38:4. et circumagam te et ponam frenum in maxillis tuis et educam te et omnem exercitum tuum equos et equites vestitos loricis universos multitudinem magnam hastam et clypeum arripientium et gladiumAnd I will turn thee about, and I will put a bit in thy jaws: and I will bring thee forth, and all thy army, horses and horsemen all clothed with coats of mail, a great multitude, armed with spears and shields and swords.
4. and I will turn thee about, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed in full armour, a great company with buckler and shield, all of them handling swords:
And say, Thus saith the Lord GOD; Behold, I [am] against thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal:

38:3 и скажи: так говорит Господь Бог: вот, Я на тебя, Гог, князь Роша, Мешеха и Фувала!
38:4
καὶ και and; even
συνάξω συναγω gather
σε σε.1 you
καὶ και and; even
πᾶσαν πας all; every
τὴν ο the
δύναμίν δυναμις power; ability
σου σου of you; your
ἵππους ιππος horse
καὶ και and; even
ἱππεῖς ιππευς cavalry; rider
ἐνδεδυμένους ενδυω dress in; wear
θώρακας θωραξ breastplate
πάντας πας all; every
συναγωγὴ συναγωγη gathering
πολλή πολυς much; many
πέλται πελτη and; even
περικεφαλαῖαι περικεφαλαια helmet
καὶ και and; even
μάχαιραι μαχαιρα short sword
38:4
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שֹׁ֣ובַבְתִּ֔יךָ šˈôvavtˈîḵā שׁוב return
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נָתַתִּ֥י nāṯattˌî נתן give
חַחִ֖ים ḥaḥˌîm חָח thorn
בִּ bi בְּ in
לְחָיֶ֑יךָ lᵊḥāyˈeʸḵā לְחִי jaw
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הֹוצֵאתִי֩ hôṣēṯˌî יצא go out
אֹותְךָ֙ ʔôṯᵊḵˌā אֵת [object marker]
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole
חֵילֶ֜ךָ ḥêlˈeḵā חַיִל power
סוּסִ֣ים sûsˈîm סוּס horse
וּ û וְ and
פָרָשִׁ֗ים fārāšˈîm פָּרָשׁ horseman
לְבֻשֵׁ֤י lᵊvušˈê לָבוּשׁ clad
מִכְלֹול֙ miḵlôl מִכְלֹול perfection
כֻּלָּ֔ם kullˈām כֹּל whole
קָהָ֥ל qāhˌāl קָהָל assembly
רָב֙ rˌāv רַב much
צִנָּ֣ה ṣinnˈā צִנָּה shield
וּ û וְ and
מָגֵ֔ן māḡˈēn מָגֵן shield
תֹּפְשֵׂ֥י tōfᵊśˌê תפשׂ seize
חֲרָבֹ֖ות ḥᵃrāvˌôṯ חֶרֶב dagger
כֻּלָּֽם׃ kullˈām כֹּל whole
38:4. et circumagam te et ponam frenum in maxillis tuis et educam te et omnem exercitum tuum equos et equites vestitos loricis universos multitudinem magnam hastam et clypeum arripientium et gladium
And I will turn thee about, and I will put a bit in thy jaws: and I will bring thee forth, and all thy army, horses and horsemen all clothed with coats of mail, a great multitude, armed with spears and shields and swords.
4. and I will turn thee about, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed in full armour, a great company with buckler and shield, all of them handling swords:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
4. Хотя Гог предпринял настоящий поход по собственному побуждению, из жажды добычи (ст. 13), но он следовал незаметному побуждению со стороны Иеговы, который его вел, как дикого зверя, по своей воле. В Откр XX:8: он ведется сатаной; ср. 2: Цар XXIV:1: с 1: Пар XXI:1. Позднейшим богословием отношение Божества к таким действиям обозначается через термин “попущение”. - “И поверну тебя” евр. шув, возвращать в форме Поель - допускает и перевод “прельщу” (ср. Ис XLVII:10), “приманю”; но LXX: “обращу тя назад”; Вульг. circumagam. - “Вложу удила в челюсти твои” - см. объяснение XXIX:4; usteron proteron. Ватиканский, и др. не имеют обоих предложений. - Дальнейшее описание врага соответствует ассиро-вавилонскому войску, о котором пророк неоднократно употребляет слова хайл “войско”, слав. “силу” и “полчище”, кагал. - “В полном вооружении” букв. “в одежде совершенства”, - блестящее вооружение. См. объяснение XXIII:12. - “Большое полчище”, может быть, пехота в отличие от упомянутой ранее конницы, вооруженная если не так блестяще, то все же полно: “в бронях, со щитами”. Щиты более были принадлежностью пехоты (а не конницы), какою славились по XXVII:10: исчисляемые в след. стихе народы.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:4: I will turn thee back - Thy enterprise shall fail.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:4: With all sorts - Or, "gorgeously;" see the marginal reference. Omit "of armor."
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:4: I will turn: Eze 29:4, Eze 39:2; Kg2 19:28; Isa 37:29
horses: Eze 38:15; Dan 11:40
all of them: Eze 23:12
handling: Ch1 12:8; Ch2 25:5; Jer 46:9
Geneva 1599
38:4 And I will turn thee back, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thy army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts [of armour, even] a great company [with] bucklers and shields, all of them (b) handling swords:
(b) He shows that the enemy would bend themselves against the Church but it would be to their own destruction.
John Gill
38:4 And I will turn thee back, and put hooks into thy jaws,.... Or, I will put hooks in thy jaws, and with them turn thee back; or rather, "turn thee about" (f); and lead thee where and as I please; for this is not to be understood of God's putting hooks into his jaws, and leading him back from his enterprise of invading the land of Judea; as he put a hook in the nose and a bridle in the lips of the king of Assyria, and brought him back from Jerusalem, Is 37:29, but of his using him thus in his providence to draw him to the land of Israel, out of his own land, as fishes are drawn with the hook out of the water. The sense is, that he would so work upon and influence the heart of Gog, that he should be inclined to come out of his own land and invade Judea; just as the Lord is said to draw Sisera and his army, Judg 4:7, as Kimchi and Ben Melech observe. So the Targum,
"I will persuade thee, and put hooks in thy jaws;''
that is, incline his heart to take such a step, which should be to his destruction:
and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army; all his janizaries, and large army out of Turkey, and other parts of his dominions:
horses and horsemen; the Turkish armies, chiefly consisting of cavalry; See Gill on Rev_ 9:16,
all of them clothed with all sorts of armour; or completely clothed, as the Targum; for the word "armour" is not in the text; and besides, their armour is particularly mentioned afterwards; and so Kimchi has it, with all kind of ornaments, richly clothed and decorated, especially the principal officers, and, so made a fine show: even a
great company with bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords; or large armies, as the Targum; the Turks have always been used to bring prodigious large armies into the field; See Gill on Rev_ 9:16.
(f) "circumducam te", Piscator; "circumagam te", Grotius.
John Wesley
38:4 Handling swords - That is, very ready, expert and strong in using the sword.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:4 turn thee back--as a refractory wild beast, which thinks to take its own way, but is bent by a superior power to turn on a course which must end in its destruction. Satan shall be, by overruling Providence, permitted to deceive them to their ruin (Rev_ 20:7-8).
hooks into thy jaws-- (Ezek 29:4; 4Kings 19:28).
38:438:4: եւ պաշարեցից զքեզ, եւ արկից դանդանաւանդ ՚ի կզակս քո, եւ ժողովեցից զքեզ եւ զամենայն զօրութիւնս քո. զհեծեալս եւ զերիվարս, զվառեալս եւ զսպառազէնս ազգաց բազմաց. վահանաւորս եւ սաղաւարտաւորս, եւ սուսերաւորս. եւ ամենեքին սոքա ընդ նոսա[12905]։ [12905] Ոմանք. Եւ արկից դադանաւանդ։
4 ես պաշարելու եմ քեզ, սանձ եմ գցելու քո ծնօտներին, հաւաքելու եմ քեզ ու քո բոլոր զօրքերը, հեծեալներին ու երիվարները, բազում ազգերի զինավառուածներին ու սպառազինուածներին, վահանաւորներին, սաղաւարտաւորներին ու սուսերաւորներին, բոլորին միասին՝
4 Քեզ պիտի շրջապատեմ եւ քու կզակներուդ կարթեր պիտի անցընեմ ու քեզ եւ քու բոլոր բանակդ պիտի հանեմ, ձիերն ու ձիաւորները, ամէնքն ալ կատարելապէս հագուած եւ վահանաւորներուն ու ասպարաւորներուն մեծ խումբը՝ բոլորն ալ սուր բռնող.
եւ պաշարեցից`` զքեզ, եւ արկից դանդանաւանդ ի կզակս քո, եւ [820]ժողովեցից զքեզ եւ զամենայն զօրութիւնս քո, զհեծեալս եւ զերիվարս, զվառեալս եւ զսպառազէնս ազգաց բազմաց, վահանաւորս եւ սաղաւարտաւորս եւ սուսերաւորս:

38:4: եւ պաշարեցից զքեզ, եւ արկից դանդանաւանդ ՚ի կզակս քո, եւ ժողովեցից զքեզ եւ զամենայն զօրութիւնս քո. զհեծեալս եւ զերիվարս, զվառեալս եւ զսպառազէնս ազգաց բազմաց. վահանաւորս եւ սաղաւարտաւորս, եւ սուսերաւորս. եւ ամենեքին սոքա ընդ նոսա[12905]։
[12905] Ոմանք. Եւ արկից դադանաւանդ։
4 ես պաշարելու եմ քեզ, սանձ եմ գցելու քո ծնօտներին, հաւաքելու եմ քեզ ու քո բոլոր զօրքերը, հեծեալներին ու երիվարները, բազում ազգերի զինավառուածներին ու սպառազինուածներին, վահանաւորներին, սաղաւարտաւորներին ու սուսերաւորներին, բոլորին միասին՝
4 Քեզ պիտի շրջապատեմ եւ քու կզակներուդ կարթեր պիտի անցընեմ ու քեզ եւ քու բոլոր բանակդ պիտի հանեմ, ձիերն ու ձիաւորները, ամէնքն ալ կատարելապէս հագուած եւ վահանաւորներուն ու ասպարաւորներուն մեծ խումբը՝ բոլորն ալ սուր բռնող.
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:438:4 И поверну тебя, и вложу удила в челюсти твои, и выведу тебя и все войско твое, коней и всадников, всех в полном вооружении, большое полчище, в бронях и со щитами, всех вооруженных мечами,
38:5 Πέρσαι περσης and; even Αἰθίοπες αιθιοψ Aithiops; Ethiops καὶ και and; even Λίβυες λιβυες all; every περικεφαλαίαις περικεφαλαια helmet καὶ και and; even πέλταις πελτη small light shield
38:5 פָּרַ֛ס pārˈas פָּרַס Persia כּ֥וּשׁ kˌûš כּוּשׁ Cush וּ û וְ and פ֖וּט fˌûṭ פּוּט Put אִתָּ֑ם ʔittˈām אֵת together with כֻּלָּ֖ם kullˌām כֹּל whole מָגֵ֥ן māḡˌēn מָגֵן shield וְ wᵊ וְ and כֹובָֽע׃ ḵôvˈāʕ כֹּובַע helmet
38:5. Persae Aethiopes et Lybies cum eis omnes scutati et galeatiThe Persians, Ethiopians, and Libyans with them, all with shields and helmets.
5. Persia, Cush, and Put with them; all of them with shield and helmet:
And I will turn thee back, and put hooks into thy jaws, and I will bring thee forth, and all thine army, horses and horsemen, all of them clothed with all sorts [of armour, even] a great company [with] bucklers and shields, all of them handling swords:

38:4 И поверну тебя, и вложу удила в челюсти твои, и выведу тебя и все войско твое, коней и всадников, всех в полном вооружении, большое полчище, в бронях и со щитами, всех вооруженных мечами,
38:5
Πέρσαι περσης and; even
Αἰθίοπες αιθιοψ Aithiops; Ethiops
καὶ και and; even
Λίβυες λιβυες all; every
περικεφαλαίαις περικεφαλαια helmet
καὶ και and; even
πέλταις πελτη small light shield
38:5
פָּרַ֛ס pārˈas פָּרַס Persia
כּ֥וּשׁ kˌûš כּוּשׁ Cush
וּ û וְ and
פ֖וּט fˌûṭ פּוּט Put
אִתָּ֑ם ʔittˈām אֵת together with
כֻּלָּ֖ם kullˌām כֹּל whole
מָגֵ֥ן māḡˌēn מָגֵן shield
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כֹובָֽע׃ ḵôvˈāʕ כֹּובַע helmet
38:5. Persae Aethiopes et Lybies cum eis omnes scutati et galeati
The Persians, Ethiopians, and Libyans with them, all with shields and helmets.
5. Persia, Cush, and Put with them; all of them with shield and helmet:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
5. Кроме неслыханных народов севера войско Гога будет иметь и целый ряд народов юга или цивилизованных, но еще не выступавших на видное историческое поприще. К этим последним народам принадлежат прежде всего конечно персы, евр. парас - см. объяснение XX:10. - “Ефиоплян” - см. объяснение XXIX:10, слав. “мряне” - “Ливийцев” евр. Фут или Пут, см. объяснение XXVII:10. Слав. еще “Лидяне” (нет и в греч.) - дуплет или вставка по XXVII:10. - “Со щитами” - см. в ст. 4.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:5: Persia - That a part of this country was tributary to Antiochus, see 1 Maccabees 3:31.
Ethiopia, and Libya - That these were auxiliaries of Antiochus is evident from Dan 11:43 : "The Libyans and Ethiopians shall be at his steps."
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:5: Libya and Ethiopia, mixed with the northern invaders, are tribes from the extreme south, to show that this is a general combination of the foes of God's people.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:5: Persia: Eze 27:10
Libya: or, Phut, Eze 30:5; Gen 10:6; Ch1 1:8; Nah 3:9, Put
Geneva 1599
38:5 (c) Persia, Cush, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet:
(c) The Persians, Ethiopians and men of Africa.
John Gill
38:5 Persia, Ethiopia, and Lybia with them,.... These are the confederates or auxiliaries of the Turks, which shall join with them in this expedition. Persia is a neighbouring kingdom to the Turks, and may fall into their hands before this comes to pass; and is in a fair way for it at this time, through the internal divisions in it; however, it will be confederate with them. Ethiopia or Cush does not design the country of the Abyssines in the dominions of the Great Mogul, but Arabia Chusea, which lay between Judea and Egypt, and is now in the hands of the Turks; and Lybia or Phut is the name of one of the sons of Ham, Gen 10:6 who, according to Josephus (g), founded Lybia; and from him the inhabitants of it were called Phuteans (as they are here by the Targum); and he observes that there is a river of his name in Mauritania. Lybia is a country in Africa, to the west of Egypt and subject to the Turks:
all of them with shield and helmet; the Lybians are described by Jeremiah, Jer 46:9, as
those that handle the shield; and the Egyptians, to whom the Lybians were near neighbours, and whom they might imitate in their warlike arms, as in other things, wore shields down to the feet, as Xenophon (h) relates.
(g) Antiqu. l. 1. c. 6. sect. 2. (h) Cyropaedia, l. 6. c. 14. & l. 7. c. 11.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:5 Persia . . . Libya--expressly specified by APPIAN as supplying the ranks of Antiochus' army.
38:538:5: Պարսիկք եւ Եթւովպացիք, Լիբէացիք եւ Լիդացիք, ամենեքին սաղաւարտեալք՝ եւ վահանաւորք.
5 պարսիկներին ու եթովպացիներին, լիբիացիներին ու լիւդացիներին, բոլորին, որ սաղաւարտակիր են ու վահանաւոր,
5 Անոնց հետ Պարսիկները, Եթովպիացիներն ու Փուդացիները, ամէնքն ալ ասպարաւոր ու սաղաւարտաւոր,
եւ ամենեքին սոքա ընդ նոսա, Պարսիկք եւ Եթէովպացիք, [821]Լիբէացիք եւ Լիդացիք``, ամենեքին սաղաւարտեալք եւ վահանաւորք:

38:5: Պարսիկք եւ Եթւովպացիք, Լիբէացիք եւ Լիդացիք, ամենեքին սաղաւարտեալք՝ եւ վահանաւորք.
5 պարսիկներին ու եթովպացիներին, լիբիացիներին ու լիւդացիներին, բոլորին, որ սաղաւարտակիր են ու վահանաւոր,
5 Անոնց հետ Պարսիկները, Եթովպիացիներն ու Փուդացիները, ամէնքն ալ ասպարաւոր ու սաղաւարտաւոր,
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:538:5 Персов, Ефиоплян и Ливийцев с ними, всех со щитами и в шлемах,
38:6 Γομερ γομερ and; even πάντες πας all; every οἱ ο the περὶ περι about; around αὐτόν αυτος he; him οἶκος οικος home; household τοῦ ο the Θεργαμα θεργαμα from; away ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part βορρᾶ βορρας north wind καὶ και and; even πάντες πας all; every οἱ ο the περὶ περι about; around αὐτόν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste πολλὰ πολυς much; many μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your
38:6 גֹּ֚מֶר ˈgōmer גֹּמֶר Gomer וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole אֲגַפֶּ֔יהָ ʔᵃḡappˈeʸhā אֲגַף troop בֵּ֚ית ˈbêṯ בַּיִת house תֹּֽוגַרְמָ֔ה tˈôḡarmˈā תֹּוגַרְמָה Togarmah יַרְכְּתֵ֥י yarkᵊṯˌê יַרְכָּה backside צָפֹ֖ון ṣāfˌôn צָפֹון north וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole אֲגַפָּ֑יו ʔᵃḡappˈāʸw אֲגַף troop עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much אִתָּֽךְ׃ ʔittˈāḵ אֵת together with
38:6. Gomer et universa agmina eius domus Thogorma latera aquilonis et totum robur eius populique multi tecumGomer, and all his bands, the house of Thogorma, the northern parts and all his strength, and many peoples with thee.
6. Gomer, and all his hordes; the house of Togarmah in the uttermost parts of the north, and all his hordes: even many peoples with thee.
Persia, Ethiopia, and Libya with them; all of them with shield and helmet:

38:5 Персов, Ефиоплян и Ливийцев с ними, всех со щитами и в шлемах,
38:6
Γομερ γομερ and; even
πάντες πας all; every
οἱ ο the
περὶ περι about; around
αὐτόν αυτος he; him
οἶκος οικος home; household
τοῦ ο the
Θεργαμα θεργαμα from; away
ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part
βορρᾶ βορρας north wind
καὶ και and; even
πάντες πας all; every
οἱ ο the
περὶ περι about; around
αὐτόν αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste
πολλὰ πολυς much; many
μετὰ μετα with; amid
σοῦ σου of you; your
38:6
גֹּ֚מֶר ˈgōmer גֹּמֶר Gomer
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
אֲגַפֶּ֔יהָ ʔᵃḡappˈeʸhā אֲגַף troop
בֵּ֚ית ˈbêṯ בַּיִת house
תֹּֽוגַרְמָ֔ה tˈôḡarmˈā תֹּוגַרְמָה Togarmah
יַרְכְּתֵ֥י yarkᵊṯˌê יַרְכָּה backside
צָפֹ֖ון ṣāfˌôn צָפֹון north
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
כָּל־ kol- כֹּל whole
אֲגַפָּ֑יו ʔᵃḡappˈāʸw אֲגַף troop
עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people
רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much
אִתָּֽךְ׃ ʔittˈāḵ אֵת together with
38:6. Gomer et universa agmina eius domus Thogorma latera aquilonis et totum robur eius populique multi tecum
Gomer, and all his bands, the house of Thogorma, the northern parts and all his strength, and many peoples with thee.
6. Gomer, and all his hordes; the house of Togarmah in the uttermost parts of the north, and all his hordes: even many peoples with thee.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
6. “Гомер” еще только как и Магог Быт X:3: = 1: Пар I:6. Отожествляется или с киммерийцами (Одис. XI, 14), клинообр. Гимирайя у Черного моря или с каппадонийцами, которые у армян, упоминаемых здесь же рядом (“дом Фогарма”), называются Гамир (Eus. Chron Arm. I, 95; II, 12). Так как киммерийцы по Страбону (I, 3, 21) делали набеги на М. Азию и даже вторглись в теснимое скифами Лидийское царство (Herod. I, 6, 15: и др.), то они могли оставить в Малой Азии у каппадонян следы своего имени (потому должно быть И. Флавий разумеет под Гомером галатийцев). Ср. также имена “Кимвры” или “Кумри”. - “Со всеми отрядами его” евр. аган, переведенное в XII,14: “все войско”, см. объяснение там. Слав. “вси иже окрест его”. - “Дом Фогарма” см. объяснение XXVII:14. - “Многие народы” более мелкие и второстепенные.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:6: Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah - The Cimmerians and Turcomanians, and other northern nations. - Calmet.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:6: Gomer: Gen 10:2; Ch1 1:5
Togarmah: Eze 27:14; Gen 10:3; Ch1 1:6; Dan 11:40
Geneva 1599
38:6 (d) Gomer, and all his troops; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his troops: [and] many people with thee.
(d) Gomer was Japheth's son, and Togarmah the son of Gomer, and are thought to be they that inhabited Asia Minor.
John Gill
38:6 Gomer, and all his bands,.... Or all his army, as the Targum. Gomer was the eldest son of Japheth, Gen 10:2, from whom descended the people called by the Greeks Galatians, or Galio-Grecians, as Josephus (i) says, who before were from him called Gomarians: others think that Phrygia, and the inhabitants of it, are meant; but, whether one or the other, they were both people of the lesser Asia, which is now in the hands of the Turks:
the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his bands; Togarmah was one of the sons of Gomer, Gen 10:3 whose posterity, according to the Greeks, as Josephus (k) says, were the Phrygians; but others rather think the Cappadocians descended from him; and that Togarmah designs their country, which also is a part of the Turkish dominions; See Gill on Ezek 27:14. Several moderns, as Calmet (l) observes, believe that the children of Togarmah peopled Turcomania in Tartary, and Scythia, and which he approves of; and the Turks are mentioned by Ben Gorion (m) as one of the ten families of Togarmah. The Targum renders it here the province of Germany; as it is also interpreted in the Talmud (n), but wrongly:
and many people with thee; from other places and nations, besides those named; especially out of the lesser Asia, as Pamphylia, Cilicia, and other places; and perhaps from Tartary, and elsewhere,
(i) Antiqu. l. 1. c. 6. sect. 1. (k) lbid. (l) Dictionary in the word "Togarmah". (m) Heb. Hist. l. 1. c. 1. p. 3. (n) T. Bab. Yoma, fol. 10. 1.
John Wesley
38:6 Gomer - Inhabitants of Galatia. Togarmah - Paphlagonia, and Cappadocia. The north quarters - The more northern people, the numerous Tartars.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:6 Gomer--the Celtic Cimmerians of Crim-Tartary.
Togarmah--the Armenians of the Caucasus, south of Iberia.
38:638:6: Գոմեր՝ եւ ամենեքին որ շո՛ւրջ են զնովաւ. եւ տունն Թորգոմայ ՚ի ծագացն հիւսւսոյ, եւ ամենեքին որ շուրջ զնովաւ, եւ ազգք բազումք ընդ քեզ[12906]։ [12906] Ոմանք. Որ շուրջ զնովաւ... որ շուրջ են զնովաւ։
6 Գոմերին ու բոլոր նրանց, որ նրա շուրջն են, Թորգոմայ տունը՝ հիւսիսի կողմերից, ու բոլոր նրանց, որ նրա շուրջն են, բազմաթիւ ազգերի էլ՝ քեզ հետ:
6 Նաեւ Գոմեր ու անոր բոլոր գունդերը, Թորգոմի տունը հիւսիսի ծայրերէն ու անոր բոլոր գունդերը, շատ ժողովուրդներ, քեզի հետ պիտի հանեմ’։
Գոմեր եւ ամենեքին որ շուրջ են զնովաւ, եւ տունն Թորգոմայ ի ծագացն հիւսիսոյ, եւ ամենեքին որ շուրջ զնովաւ, եւ ազգք բազումք ընդ քեզ:

38:6: Գոմեր՝ եւ ամենեքին որ շո՛ւրջ են զնովաւ. եւ տունն Թորգոմայ ՚ի ծագացն հիւսւսոյ, եւ ամենեքին որ շուրջ զնովաւ, եւ ազգք բազումք ընդ քեզ[12906]։
[12906] Ոմանք. Որ շուրջ զնովաւ... որ շուրջ են զնովաւ։
6 Գոմերին ու բոլոր նրանց, որ նրա շուրջն են, Թորգոմայ տունը՝ հիւսիսի կողմերից, ու բոլոր նրանց, որ նրա շուրջն են, բազմաթիւ ազգերի էլ՝ քեզ հետ:
6 Նաեւ Գոմեր ու անոր բոլոր գունդերը, Թորգոմի տունը հիւսիսի ծայրերէն ու անոր բոլոր գունդերը, շատ ժողովուրդներ, քեզի հետ պիտի հանեմ’։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:638:6 Гомера со всеми отрядами его, дом Фогарма, от пределов севера, со всеми отрядами его, многие народы с тобою.
38:7 ἑτοιμάσθητι ετοιμαζω prepare ἑτοίμασον ετοιμαζω prepare σεαυτὸν σεαυτου of yourself σὺ συ you καὶ και and; even πᾶσα πας all; every ἡ ο the συναγωγή συναγωγη gathering σου σου of you; your οἱ ο the συνηγμένοι συναγω gather μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your καὶ και and; even ἔσῃ ειμι be μοι μοι me εἰς εις into; for προφυλακήν προφυλακη guard in front
38:7 הִכֹּן֙ hikkˌōn כון be firm וְ wᵊ וְ and הָכֵ֣ן hāḵˈēn כון be firm לְךָ֔ lᵊḵˈā לְ to אַתָּ֕ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole קְהָלֶ֖ךָ qᵊhālˌeḵā קָהָל assembly הַ ha הַ the נִּקְהָלִ֣ים nniqhālˈîm קהל assemble עָלֶ֑יךָ ʕālˈeʸḵā עַל upon וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיִ֥יתָ hāyˌîṯā היה be לָהֶ֖ם lāhˌem לְ to לְ lᵊ לְ to מִשְׁמָֽר׃ mišmˈār מִשְׁמָר guard
38:7. praepara et instrue te et omnem multitudinem tuam quae coacervata est ad te et esto eis in praeceptumPrepare and make thyself ready, and all thy multitude that is assembled about thee, and be thou commander over them.
7. Be thou prepared, yea, prepare thyself, thou, and all thy companies that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto them.
Gomer, and all his bands; the house of Togarmah of the north quarters, and all his bands: [and] many people with thee:

38:6 Гомера со всеми отрядами его, дом Фогарма, от пределов севера, со всеми отрядами его, многие народы с тобою.
38:7
ἑτοιμάσθητι ετοιμαζω prepare
ἑτοίμασον ετοιμαζω prepare
σεαυτὸν σεαυτου of yourself
σὺ συ you
καὶ και and; even
πᾶσα πας all; every
ἡ ο the
συναγωγή συναγωγη gathering
σου σου of you; your
οἱ ο the
συνηγμένοι συναγω gather
μετὰ μετα with; amid
σοῦ σου of you; your
καὶ και and; even
ἔσῃ ειμι be
μοι μοι me
εἰς εις into; for
προφυλακήν προφυλακη guard in front
38:7
הִכֹּן֙ hikkˌōn כון be firm
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָכֵ֣ן hāḵˈēn כון be firm
לְךָ֔ lᵊḵˈā לְ to
אַתָּ֕ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
קְהָלֶ֖ךָ qᵊhālˌeḵā קָהָל assembly
הַ ha הַ the
נִּקְהָלִ֣ים nniqhālˈîm קהל assemble
עָלֶ֑יךָ ʕālˈeʸḵā עַל upon
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיִ֥יתָ hāyˌîṯā היה be
לָהֶ֖ם lāhˌem לְ to
לְ lᵊ לְ to
מִשְׁמָֽר׃ mišmˈār מִשְׁמָר guard
38:7. praepara et instrue te et omnem multitudinem tuam quae coacervata est ad te et esto eis in praeceptum
Prepare and make thyself ready, and all thy multitude that is assembled about thee, and be thou commander over them.
7. Be thou prepared, yea, prepare thyself, thou, and all thy companies that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto them.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
7. “Готовься и снаряжайся”. Иронический совет: он все равно погибнет. - “Будь им вождем”. Все здесь названные народы не подданные Гога, а только находятся под его командой; отсюда и несколько необыкновенное выражение. Но евр. мишмар значит собств. “знамя”. LXX: “и будеши Ми в преднюю стражбу”, profulakthn, авангард (Бертолет): “резерв”, смысл, подтверждаемый след. стихом.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:7: Spoken ironically. Make all thy preparations, they will be in vain.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:7: Ch2 25:8; Psa 2:1-4; Isa 8:9, Isa 8:10, Isa 37:22; Jer 46:3-5, Jer 46:14-16, Jer 51:12; Joe 3:9-12; Amo 4:12; Zac 14:2, Zac 14:3
Geneva 1599
38:7 Be thou prepared, and (e) prepare for thyself, thou, and all thy company that are assembled to thee, and be thou a guard to them.
(e) Signifying that all the people of the world would assemble themselves against the Church and Christ their head.
John Gill
38:7 Be thou prepared, and prepare for thyself,.... All warlike stores and provisions: this is ironically said; and suggests that he would do so, and yet all would be in vain, and to no purpose:
thou and all thy company, that are assembled unto thee; or all thine armies, as the Targum, gathered out of his dominions, and made up of his auxiliaries and allies; let them all be furnished with arms, and everything proper for the expedition designed:
and be thou a guard unto them; the general of them; let them observe and obey thy word of command; guide and direct, guard and protect them in their march; and take care of them when entered the land of Judea, that they are not exposed to any unnecessary danger, or cut off by any stratagem or ambush: this is also sarcastically said; signifying that let him use all the care and caution that a wise and prudent general can do, yet he and his army should perish.
John Wesley
38:7 Be thou prepared - God and the church deride this mighty preparation.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:7 Irony. Prepare thee and all thine with all needful accoutrements for war--that ye may perish together.
be . . . a guard unto them--that is, if thou canst.
38:738:7: Պատրաստեա՛ց, պատրաստեա՛ զանձն քո՝ դո՛ւ եւ ամենայն ժողովք որ ժողովեալ են ընդ քեզ. եւ եղիցես ինձ յառաջապահ[12907]։ [12907] Ոսկան. Պատրաստեա՛. պատրաստեա՛ զան՛՛։ Ոմանք. Եւ ամենայն ժողովուրդք որ ժողովեալ են։
7 Պատրաստուի՛ր, պատրա՛ստ եղէք դու եւ քեզ մօտ հաւաքուած ամբողջ բազմութիւնը: Դու ինձ համար առաջապահ ես լինելու:
7 ‘Պատրա՛ստ եղիր եւ քեզ ու քու քովդ հաւաքուած բոլոր ժողովուրդը պատրաստէ ու դուն անոնց պահապան եղիր։
Պատրաստեաց, պատրաստեա զանձն քո, դու եւ ամենայն ժողովք որ ժողովեալ են ընդ քեզ, եւ եղիցես [822]ինձ յառաջապահ:

38:7: Պատրաստեա՛ց, պատրաստեա՛ զանձն քո՝ դո՛ւ եւ ամենայն ժողովք որ ժողովեալ են ընդ քեզ. եւ եղիցես ինձ յառաջապահ[12907]։
[12907] Ոսկան. Պատրաստեա՛. պատրաստեա՛ զան՛՛։ Ոմանք. Եւ ամենայն ժողովուրդք որ ժողովեալ են։
7 Պատրաստուի՛ր, պատրա՛ստ եղէք դու եւ քեզ մօտ հաւաքուած ամբողջ բազմութիւնը: Դու ինձ համար առաջապահ ես լինելու:
7 ‘Պատրա՛ստ եղիր եւ քեզ ու քու քովդ հաւաքուած բոլոր ժողովուրդը պատրաստէ ու դուն անոնց պահապան եղիր։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:738:7 Готовься и снаряжайся, ты и все полчища твои, собравшиеся к тебе, и будь им вождем.
38:8 ἀφ᾿ απο from; away ἡμερῶν ημερα day πλειόνων πλειων more; majority ἑτοιμασθήσεται ετοιμαζω prepare καὶ και and; even ἐπ᾿ επι in; on ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part ἐτῶν ετος year ἐλεύσεται ερχομαι come; go καὶ και and; even ἥξει ηκω here εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τὴν ο the ἀπεστραμμένην αποστρεφω turn away; alienate ἀπὸ απο from; away μαχαίρας μαχαιρα short sword συνηγμένων συναγω gather ἀπὸ απο from; away ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste πολλῶν πολυς much; many ἐπὶ επι in; on γῆν γη earth; land Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ἣ ος who; what ἐγενήθη γινομαι happen; become ἔρημος ερημος lonesome; wilderness δι᾿ δια through; because of ὅλου ολος whole; wholly καὶ και and; even οὗτος ουτος this; he ἐξ εκ from; out of ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste ἐξελήλυθεν εξερχομαι come out; go out καὶ και and; even κατοικήσουσιν κατοικεω settle ἐπ᾿ επι in; on εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace ἅπαντες απας all at once; everything
38:8 מִ mi מִן from יָּמִ֣ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day רַבִּים֮ rabbîm רַב much תִּפָּקֵד֒ tippāqˌēḏ פקד miss בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אַחֲרִ֨ית ʔaḥᵃrˌîṯ אַחֲרִית end הַ ha הַ the שָּׁנִ֜ים ššānˈîm שָׁנָה year תָּבֹ֣וא׀ tāvˈô בוא come אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֶ֣רֶץ׀ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth מְשֹׁובֶ֣בֶת mᵊšôvˈeveṯ שׁוב return מֵ mē מִן from חֶ֗רֶב ḥˈerev חֶרֶב dagger מְקֻבֶּ֨צֶת֙ mᵊqubbˈeṣeṯ קבץ collect מֵ mē מִן from עַמִּ֣ים ʕammˈîm עַם people רַבִּ֔ים rabbˈîm רַב much עַ֚ל ˈʕal עַל upon הָרֵ֣י hārˈê הַר mountain יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] הָי֥וּ hāyˌû היה be לְ lᵊ לְ to חָרְבָּ֖ה ḥārᵊbbˌoh חָרְבָּה ruin תָּמִ֑יד tāmˈîḏ תָּמִיד continuity וְ wᵊ וְ and הִיא֙ hî הִיא she מֵ mē מִן from עַמִּ֣ים ʕammˈîm עַם people הוּצָ֔אָה hûṣˈāʔā יצא go out וְ wᵊ וְ and יָשְׁב֥וּ yāšᵊvˌû ישׁב sit לָ lā לְ to בֶ֖טַח vˌeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust כֻּלָּֽם׃ kullˈām כֹּל whole
38:8. post dies multos visitaberis in novissimo annorum venies ad terram quae reversa est a gladio congregata est de populis multis ad montes Israhel qui fuerunt deserti iugiter haec de populis educta est et habitaverunt in ea confidenter universiAfter many days thou shalt be visited: at the end of years thou shalt come to the land that is returned from the sword, and is gathered out of many nations, to the mountains of Israel which have been continually waste: but it hath been brought forth out of the nations, and they shall all of them dwell securely in it.
8. After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, that is gathered out of many peoples, upon the mountains of Israel, which have been a continual waste: but it is brought forth out of the peoples, and they shall dwell securely, all of them.
Be thou prepared, and prepare for thyself, thou, and all thy company that are assembled unto thee, and be thou a guard unto them:

38:7 Готовься и снаряжайся, ты и все полчища твои, собравшиеся к тебе, и будь им вождем.
38:8
ἀφ᾿ απο from; away
ἡμερῶν ημερα day
πλειόνων πλειων more; majority
ἑτοιμασθήσεται ετοιμαζω prepare
καὶ και and; even
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part
ἐτῶν ετος year
ἐλεύσεται ερχομαι come; go
καὶ και and; even
ἥξει ηκω here
εἰς εις into; for
τὴν ο the
γῆν γη earth; land
τὴν ο the
ἀπεστραμμένην αποστρεφω turn away; alienate
ἀπὸ απο from; away
μαχαίρας μαχαιρα short sword
συνηγμένων συναγω gather
ἀπὸ απο from; away
ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste
πολλῶν πολυς much; many
ἐπὶ επι in; on
γῆν γη earth; land
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
ἣ ος who; what
ἐγενήθη γινομαι happen; become
ἔρημος ερημος lonesome; wilderness
δι᾿ δια through; because of
ὅλου ολος whole; wholly
καὶ και and; even
οὗτος ουτος this; he
ἐξ εκ from; out of
ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste
ἐξελήλυθεν εξερχομαι come out; go out
καὶ και and; even
κατοικήσουσιν κατοικεω settle
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace
ἅπαντες απας all at once; everything
38:8
מִ mi מִן from
יָּמִ֣ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day
רַבִּים֮ rabbîm רַב much
תִּפָּקֵד֒ tippāqˌēḏ פקד miss
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אַחֲרִ֨ית ʔaḥᵃrˌîṯ אַחֲרִית end
הַ ha הַ the
שָּׁנִ֜ים ššānˈîm שָׁנָה year
תָּבֹ֣וא׀ tāvˈô בוא come
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֶ֣רֶץ׀ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth
מְשֹׁובֶ֣בֶת mᵊšôvˈeveṯ שׁוב return
מֵ mē מִן from
חֶ֗רֶב ḥˈerev חֶרֶב dagger
מְקֻבֶּ֨צֶת֙ mᵊqubbˈeṣeṯ קבץ collect
מֵ mē מִן from
עַמִּ֣ים ʕammˈîm עַם people
רַבִּ֔ים rabbˈîm רַב much
עַ֚ל ˈʕal עַל upon
הָרֵ֣י hārˈê הַר mountain
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative]
הָי֥וּ hāyˌû היה be
לְ lᵊ לְ to
חָרְבָּ֖ה ḥārᵊbbˌoh חָרְבָּה ruin
תָּמִ֑יד tāmˈîḏ תָּמִיד continuity
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הִיא֙ hî הִיא she
מֵ mē מִן from
עַמִּ֣ים ʕammˈîm עַם people
הוּצָ֔אָה hûṣˈāʔā יצא go out
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָשְׁב֥וּ yāšᵊvˌû ישׁב sit
לָ lā לְ to
בֶ֖טַח vˌeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust
כֻּלָּֽם׃ kullˈām כֹּל whole
38:8. post dies multos visitaberis in novissimo annorum venies ad terram quae reversa est a gladio congregata est de populis multis ad montes Israhel qui fuerunt deserti iugiter haec de populis educta est et habitaverunt in ea confidenter universi
After many days thou shalt be visited: at the end of years thou shalt come to the land that is returned from the sword, and is gathered out of many nations, to the mountains of Israel which have been continually waste: but it hath been brought forth out of the nations, and they shall all of them dwell securely in it.
8. After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land that is brought back from the sword, that is gathered out of many peoples, upon the mountains of Israel, which have been a continual waste: but it is brought forth out of the peoples, and they shall dwell securely, all of them.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
8. Хотя Гог и уже готов, но еще не наступило время Господу воспользоваться им, ибо сначала Израиль должен водвориться в своей земле. - “После многих дней” (ср. Ис XXIV:22) то же, что “в последние годы”, при конце Мира, по Откр XX:7: после таинственных 1000: лет. - “Понадобишься” - предположительный перевод евр. типпакед, котор. LXX точнее переводят “уготвишися” (соб. “делать смотр”), Вульг. visitaberis. - “Землю, избавленную от меча”. Земля - синоним народа, о котором, собственно, только можно сказать: избавлены (но LXX: низвращенную) от меча, и особенно “собранную из многих народов”, из плена. - “Горы Израилевы” - любимое у Иезекииля название Палестины, в котором сквозит любовь к своей стране горца, поселенного насильно в далекой и низменной чужбине. - “постоянном запустении”, LXX: “пуст весьма”, di olon. Палестина была в запустении в течение 70: лет плена; но выражение может указывать на время от смерти Спасителя до пришествия Антихриста в течение которого евреи находятся в рассеянии. - “Все они будут жить безопасно”. “Таково будет положение церкви пред последней борьбой между добром и злом” (Трош.).
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:8: In the latter years thou shalt come - This was fulfilled about four hundred years after. - Martin. The expedition of Cambyses against Egypt was about twelve years after the return of the Jews from Babylon. - Calmet.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:8: As Gog was drawn on to his attack upon Israel in order to his ultimate ruin, therefore his preparations were the first step in his visitation from the Almighty.
After many days - For "many days." Many a long day shall the hand of God be upon thee, drawing thee on to thy ruin, and in the latter days shalt thou come.
The land - literally, a "land" once laid waste by the sword, but now delivered from it, whose inhabitants once scattered have been gathered together from out of many peoples.
Always - Rather, a long time. The mountains were at the time of Gog's advance again cultivated and populous.
And they shall dwell - Rather, and they dwell. It is a description of the actual condition at the time of Gog's invasion (compare Jdg 18:7). Such was the condition of the restored Jews in their prosperous days, after which came invasion. Such shall be the condition of the Church pRev_ious to the final conflict between good and evil.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:8: many days: Eze 38:16; Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Deu 4:30; Jer 48:47, Jer 49:39; Hos 3:3-5; Hab 2:3
thou shalt be: Exo 20:5; Isa 24:22, Isa 29:6; Jer 32:5; Lam 4:22
into the land: Eze 38:12, Eze 36:24-38, Eze 37:21-28, Eze 39:27-29; Isa 11:11-16; Jer 30:3, Jer 30:18, Jer 32:37; Amo 9:14, Amo 9:15
the mountains: Eze 34:13, Eze 36:1-8
it is: Pe1 2:9
and they shall: Eze 38:11, Eze 28:26, Eze 34:25-28; Jer 23:6, Jer 33:16
John Gill
38:8 After many days thou shalt be visited,.... After the Ottoman empire has stood a long time, as it has already; when the many days will be ended that Israel should be without a king and a prince, &c. Hos 3:4, then shall Gog or the Turk be visited of God, not in a way of grace, but vengeance; he shall be punished for all his iniquities, and his punishment or destruction will be brought about in the following manner:
in the latter years thou shall come into the land that is brought back from the sword; that is, into the land of Judea, the right owners of which shall now be returned unto it; who have been for many years drove and kept out of it by the sword of their enemies; see Jer 31:2 and these "latter years" are the same with the "latter days", in which these people shall seek the Lord and the Messiah, and fear him and his goodness, and return to their own land, Hos 3:5, when the Turks, enraged at it, will raise a numerous army, and enter it, in order to repossess it. The description of the Jews, who are most manifestly pointed at, is continued: and
is gathered out of many people against the mountains of Israel; or rather, "to the mountains of Israel" (o); for it seems to design the land of Judea, that is, the people of it; who shall be gathered out of the several nations where they are now dispersed, and brought into their own land; described by the mountains of Israel, because a mountainous country, and a very fruitful one; Ezek 34:13, and not the army of Gog gathered out of many nations, as before observed, to march against the people of the Jews; though this seems to be the sense of the Targum,
"in the end of years thou shalt come into the land, against which are turned those that slay with the sword, who are gathered out of many people against the mountains of the land of Israel:''
which have been always waste: of a longer time than the seventy years' captivity, even ever since the destruction of it by the Romans; and if the time of the carrying captive of the ten tribes by Salmanezer is respected, it is longer still:
but it brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them; that is, the people of the Jews, the proprietors of the land of Israel, shall now be brought forth out of each the nations where they are scattered, and shall inhabit their own land, and dwell in the utmost security, having nothing to fear from their most potent enemies, even Gog himself; and though he shall come against them in the following manner.
(o) "ad montes Israel", Pagninus, Cocceius, Starckius.
John Wesley
38:8 After many days - In the latter days of the Messiah's kingdom among men. In the later years - These must be cotemporary with the many days already mentioned. Thou - Gog with all thy numbers. The land - The land of the Jews, a people recovered from captivity, into which the sword of their enemy had brought them. Always waste - It is already two thousand four hundred years since the ten tribes were carried away by Salmanezer. But it - The land of Canaan, that is, the people of it.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:8 thou shall be visited--in wrath, by God (Is 29:6). Probably there is allusion to Is 24:21-22, "The host of the high ones . . . shall be gathered . . . as prisoners . . . in me pit . . . and after many days shall they be visited." I therefore prefer English Version to GROTIUS rendering, "Thou shalt get the command" of the expedition. The "after many days" is defined by "in the latter years," that is, in the times just before the coming of Messiah, namely, under Antiochus, before His first coming; under Antichrist, before His second coming.
the mountains of Israel . . . always waste--that is, waste during the long period of the captivity, the earnest of the much longer period of Judea's present desolation (to which the language "always waste" more fully applies). This marks the impious atrocity of the act, to assail God's people, who had only begun to recover from their protracted calamities.
but it is brought . . . and they shall dwell--rather, "And they (the Israelites) were brought . . . dwelt safely" [FAIRBAIRN]. English Version means, "Against Israel, which has been waste, but which (that is, whose people) is now (at the time of the invasion) brought forth out of the nations where they were dispersed, and shall be found by the invader dwelling securely, so as to seem an easy prey to him."
38:838:8: Յաւուրց բազմաց պատրաստեսցի, եւ ՚ի վախճան ժամանակաց եկեսցէ՛ եւ հասցէ յերկիրն յապահով ՚ի սրոյ. ժողովեալ յազգաց բազմաց յերկիրն Իսրայէլի, որ եղեւ աւերակ համօրէն. եւ նոյն յազգաց ժողովեալ՝ եւ բնակեն խաղաղութեամբ ամենեքին[12908]։ [12908] Ոսկան. Յետ աւուրց բազմաց պատ՛՛։ Ոմանք. Ապահով ՚ի սրոյ։
8 Պատրաստուի՛ր, որ բազում օրեր յետոյ, երբ գայ ժամանակների վախճանը, հասնէք սրից ապահով երկիրը՝ շատ ազգերի միջից հաւաքուելով Իսրայէլի երկրում, որ ամբողջովին աւերակ է դարձել: Նոյն ազգերի միջից հաւաքուելով՝ բոլորն էլ խաղաղութեամբ են ապրելու:
8 Շատ օրերէն ետքը քու զօրքերդ պիտի համրես* ու տարիներ յետոյ պիտի գաս այն երկրին վրայ որ սուրէն ազատուած է եւ այն ժողովուրդին վրայ, որ շատ ազգերէ հաւաքուած է Իսրայէլի լեռներուն վրայ, որոնք մշտնջենապէս աւերակ էին. բայց անոնք ազգերէն հաւաքուելով՝ ապահովութեամբ պիտի բնակին։
Յետ աւուրց բազմաց [823]պատրաստեսցի, ի վախճան ժամանակաց եկեսցէ եւ հասցէ`` յերկիրն յապահով ի սրոյ. ժողովեալ յազգաց բազմաց [824]յերկիրն Իսրայելի, որ եղեւ աւերակ համօրէն, եւ նոյն յազգաց ժողովեալ` եւ բնակեն խաղաղութեամբ`` ամենեքին:

38:8: Յաւուրց բազմաց պատրաստեսցի, եւ ՚ի վախճան ժամանակաց եկեսցէ՛ եւ հասցէ յերկիրն յապահով ՚ի սրոյ. ժողովեալ յազգաց բազմաց յերկիրն Իսրայէլի, որ եղեւ աւերակ համօրէն. եւ նոյն յազգաց ժողովեալ՝ եւ բնակեն խաղաղութեամբ ամենեքին[12908]։
[12908] Ոսկան. Յետ աւուրց բազմաց պատ՛՛։ Ոմանք. Ապահով ՚ի սրոյ։
8 Պատրաստուի՛ր, որ բազում օրեր յետոյ, երբ գայ ժամանակների վախճանը, հասնէք սրից ապահով երկիրը՝ շատ ազգերի միջից հաւաքուելով Իսրայէլի երկրում, որ ամբողջովին աւերակ է դարձել: Նոյն ազգերի միջից հաւաքուելով՝ բոլորն էլ խաղաղութեամբ են ապրելու:
8 Շատ օրերէն ետքը քու զօրքերդ պիտի համրես* ու տարիներ յետոյ պիտի գաս այն երկրին վրայ որ սուրէն ազատուած է եւ այն ժողովուրդին վրայ, որ շատ ազգերէ հաւաքուած է Իսրայէլի լեռներուն վրայ, որոնք մշտնջենապէս աւերակ էին. բայց անոնք ազգերէն հաւաքուելով՝ ապահովութեամբ պիտի բնակին։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:838:8 После многих дней ты понадобишься; в последние годы ты придешь в землю, избавленную от меча, собранную из многих народов, на горы Израилевы, которые были в постоянном запустении, но теперь жители ее будут возвращены из народов, и все они будут жить безопасно.
38:9 καὶ και and; even ἀναβήσῃ αναβαινω step up; ascend ὡς ως.1 as; how ὑετὸς υετος rain καὶ και and; even ἥξεις ηκω here ὡς ως.1 as; how νεφέλη νεφελη cloud κατακαλύψαι κατακαλυπτω veil γῆν γη earth; land καὶ και and; even ἔσῃ ειμι be σὺ συ you καὶ και and; even πάντες πας all; every οἱ ο the περὶ περι about; around σὲ σε.1 you καὶ και and; even ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste πολλὰ πολυς much; many μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your
38:9 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָלִ֨יתָ֙ ʕālˈîṯā עלה ascend כַּ ka כְּ as † הַ the שֹּׁאָ֣ה ššōʔˈā שֹׁואָה trouble תָבֹ֔וא ṯāvˈô בוא come כֶּ ke כְּ as † הַ the עָנָ֛ן ʕānˈān עָנָן cloud לְ lᵊ לְ to כַסֹּ֥ות ḵassˌôṯ כסה cover הָ hā הַ the אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth תִּֽהְיֶ֑ה tˈihyˈeh היה be אַתָּה֙ ʔattˌā אַתָּה you וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole אֲגַפֶּ֔יךָ ʔᵃḡappˈeʸḵā אֲגַף troop וְ wᵊ וְ and עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much אֹותָֽךְ׃ ס ʔôṯˈāḵ . s אֵת [object marker]
38:9. ascendens autem quasi tempestas venies et quasi nubes ut operias terram tu et omnia agmina tua et populi multi tecumAnd thou shalt go up and come like a storm, and like a cloud to cover the land, thou and all thy bands and many people with thee.
9. And thou shalt ascend, thou shalt come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy hordes, and many peoples with thee.
After many days thou shalt be visited: in the latter years thou shalt come into the land [that is] brought back from the sword, [and is] gathered out of many people, against the mountains of Israel, which have been always waste: but it is brought forth out of the nations, and they shall dwell safely all of them:

38:8 После многих дней ты понадобишься; в последние годы ты придешь в землю, избавленную от меча, собранную из многих народов, на горы Израилевы, которые были в постоянном запустении, но теперь жители ее будут возвращены из народов, и все они будут жить безопасно.
38:9
καὶ και and; even
ἀναβήσῃ αναβαινω step up; ascend
ὡς ως.1 as; how
ὑετὸς υετος rain
καὶ και and; even
ἥξεις ηκω here
ὡς ως.1 as; how
νεφέλη νεφελη cloud
κατακαλύψαι κατακαλυπτω veil
γῆν γη earth; land
καὶ και and; even
ἔσῃ ειμι be
σὺ συ you
καὶ και and; even
πάντες πας all; every
οἱ ο the
περὶ περι about; around
σὲ σε.1 you
καὶ και and; even
ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste
πολλὰ πολυς much; many
μετὰ μετα with; amid
σοῦ σου of you; your
38:9
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָלִ֨יתָ֙ ʕālˈîṯā עלה ascend
כַּ ka כְּ as
† הַ the
שֹּׁאָ֣ה ššōʔˈā שֹׁואָה trouble
תָבֹ֔וא ṯāvˈô בוא come
כֶּ ke כְּ as
† הַ the
עָנָ֛ן ʕānˈān עָנָן cloud
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כַסֹּ֥ות ḵassˌôṯ כסה cover
הָ hā הַ the
אָ֖רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
תִּֽהְיֶ֑ה tˈihyˈeh היה be
אַתָּה֙ ʔattˌā אַתָּה you
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
אֲגַפֶּ֔יךָ ʔᵃḡappˈeʸḵā אֲגַף troop
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people
רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much
אֹותָֽךְ׃ ס ʔôṯˈāḵ . s אֵת [object marker]
38:9. ascendens autem quasi tempestas venies et quasi nubes ut operias terram tu et omnia agmina tua et populi multi tecum
And thou shalt go up and come like a storm, and like a cloud to cover the land, thou and all thy bands and many people with thee.
9. And thou shalt ascend, thou shalt come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy hordes, and many peoples with thee.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
9. Буря (слав. “дождь”) и туча - образы великого бедствия; ср. Ис XI:1: и др. “Покрыть землю”, как облако затемняет небо. - “Ты и все” - греч. esh su kai panteV, что слав. почему-то передает: “падеши ты”; о погибели еще рано.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:9: Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm - It is observable that Antiochus is thus spoken of by Daniel, Dan 11:40 : The king of the north - Antiochus, shall come against him (the king of the south is the king of Egypt) like a whirlwind.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:9: shalt ascend: Eze 13:11; Isa 21:1, Isa 21:2, Isa 25:4, Isa 28:2; Dan 11:40
like: Eze 38:16; Jer 4:13; Joe 2:2
all thy: Isa 8:9, Isa 8:10
John Gill
38:9 Thou shall ascend and come like a storm,.... That comes suddenly, looks black and terrible, and causes darkness and horror; makes a great noise, and is very threatening of danger; signifying, that the Turks will come into the land of Judea suddenly to surprise it, and with great wrath and fury, and threaten them with utter destruction; so the king of the north is said to come like a whirlwind, which many interpret of the Turk also, Dan 11:40,
thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land; with darkness and distress; suggesting the vast number of his army, which should overspread the land of Judea, as it follows:
thou and all thy bands, and many people with thee; his own army should be very numerous, and this increased by his confederates, or such who will voluntarily join him in this expedition.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:9 cloud to cover the land--with the multitude of thy forces.
38:938:9: Եւ ելցես իբրեւ զանձրեւ, եւ հասցես իբրեւ զամպ եւ ծածկեսցես զերկիրն. եւ եղիցես դու՝ եւ ամենայն ազգք բազումք՝ որ շուրջ զքեւ՛ իցեն ընդ քեզ։
9 Ելնելու ես անձրեւի պէս, հասնելու ես ամպի պէս ու ծածկելու ես երկիրը: Դու եւ քո շուրջը գտնուող, քեզ հետ եղող բոլոր ազգերն էլ բազմամարդ էք լինելու”:
9 Իսկ դուն մրրիկի պէս պիտի ելլես գաս ու երկիրը ծածկելու համար ամպի պէս պիտի ըլլաք, դուն եւ քու բոլոր գունդերդ ու շատ ժողովուրդներ քեզի հետ’»։
Եւ ելցես իբրեւ [825]զանձրեւ, եւ հասցես իբրեւ զամպ եւ ծածկեսցես զերկիրն. եւ եղիցես դու եւ ամենայն ազգք բազումք` որ շուրջ զքեւ իցեն ընդ քեզ:

38:9: Եւ ելցես իբրեւ զանձրեւ, եւ հասցես իբրեւ զամպ եւ ծածկեսցես զերկիրն. եւ եղիցես դու՝ եւ ամենայն ազգք բազումք՝ որ շուրջ զքեւ՛ իցեն ընդ քեզ։
9 Ելնելու ես անձրեւի պէս, հասնելու ես ամպի պէս ու ծածկելու ես երկիրը: Դու եւ քո շուրջը գտնուող, քեզ հետ եղող բոլոր ազգերն էլ բազմամարդ էք լինելու”:
9 Իսկ դուն մրրիկի պէս պիտի ելլես գաս ու երկիրը ծածկելու համար ամպի պէս պիտի ըլլաք, դուն եւ քու բոլոր գունդերդ ու շատ ժողովուրդներ քեզի հետ’»։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:938:9 И поднимешься, как буря, пойдешь, как туча, чтобы покрыть землю, ты и все полчища твои и многие народы с тобою.
38:10 τάδε οδε further; this λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master κύριος κυριος lord; master καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that ἀναβήσεται αναβαινω step up; ascend ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase ἐπὶ επι in; on τὴν ο the καρδίαν καρδια heart σου σου of you; your καὶ και and; even λογιῇ λογιζομαι account; count λογισμοὺς λογισμος account πονηροὺς πονηρος harmful; malignant
38:10 כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֣ה׀ hāyˈā היה be בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he יַעֲל֤וּ yaʕᵃlˈû עלה ascend דְבָרִים֙ ḏᵊvārîm דָּבָר word עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon לְבָבֶ֔ךָ lᵊvāvˈeḵā לֵבָב heart וְ wᵊ וְ and חָשַׁבְתָּ֖ ḥāšavtˌā חשׁב account מַחֲשֶׁ֥בֶת maḥᵃšˌeveṯ מַחֲשֶׁבֶת plan רָעָֽה׃ rāʕˈā רַע evil
38:10. haec dicit Dominus Deus in die illa ascendent sermones super cor tuum et cogitabis cogitationem pessimamThus saith the Lord God: In that day projects shall enter into thy heart, and thou shalt conceive a mischievous design.
10. Thus saith the Lord GOD: It shall come to pass in that day, that things shall come into thy mind, and thou shalt devise an evil device:
Thou shalt ascend and come like a storm, thou shalt be like a cloud to cover the land, thou, and all thy bands, and many people with thee:

38:9 И поднимешься, как буря, пойдешь, как туча, чтобы покрыть землю, ты и все полчища твои и многие народы с тобою.
38:10
τάδε οδε further; this
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
κύριος κυριος lord; master
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἐν εν in
τῇ ο the
ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day
ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that
ἀναβήσεται αναβαινω step up; ascend
ῥήματα ρημα statement; phrase
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὴν ο the
καρδίαν καρδια heart
σου σου of you; your
καὶ και and; even
λογιῇ λογιζομαι account; count
λογισμοὺς λογισμος account
πονηροὺς πονηρος harmful; malignant
38:10
כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus
אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֣ה׀ hāyˈā היה be
בַּ ba בְּ in
† הַ the
יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day
הַ ha הַ the
ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he
יַעֲל֤וּ yaʕᵃlˈû עלה ascend
דְבָרִים֙ ḏᵊvārîm דָּבָר word
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
לְבָבֶ֔ךָ lᵊvāvˈeḵā לֵבָב heart
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חָשַׁבְתָּ֖ ḥāšavtˌā חשׁב account
מַחֲשֶׁ֥בֶת maḥᵃšˌeveṯ מַחֲשֶׁבֶת plan
רָעָֽה׃ rāʕˈā רַע evil
38:10. haec dicit Dominus Deus in die illa ascendent sermones super cor tuum et cogitabis cogitationem pessimam
Thus saith the Lord God: In that day projects shall enter into thy heart, and thou shalt conceive a mischievous design.
10. Thus saith the Lord GOD: It shall come to pass in that day, that things shall come into thy mind, and thou shalt devise an evil device:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
10. 2-я часть речи (см. предв. зам. к главе). Хотя, в сущности, сам Иегова приводит Гога, но воля (точнее: попущение) Господа совпадает с стремлениями Гога. Параллель 2-9: и 10-16: могла бы быть классическим местом того, что в богословии называется concursus: действие, влияние Божие не есть нечто другое по сравнению с действием твари, но это единое и нераздельное действие (Берт.). “Мысли”. Евр. давар, слово, часто имеет такое значение, LXX “глаголы”, Вульг. sermones.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:10: Shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought - Antiochus purposed to invade and destroy Egypt, as well as Judea; see Dan 11:31, Dan 11:32, Dan 11:36. This Calmet interprets of Cambyses, his cruelties in Egypt, and his evil design to destroy the Israelites.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:10: that at: Psa 83:3, Psa 83:4, Psa 139:2; Pro 19:21; Isa 10:7; Mar 7:21; Joh 13:2; Act 5:3, Act 5:9; Act 8:22; Co1 4:5
think an evil thought: or, conceive a mischievous purpose, Psa 36:4; Pro 6:14, Pro 6:18, Pro 12:2; Mic 2:1
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
38:10
Account of the motive by which Gog was induced to undertake his warlike expedition, and incurred guilt, notwithstanding the fact that he was led by God, and in consequence of which he brought upon himself the judgment of destruction that was about to fall upon him. - Ezek 38:10. Thus saith the Lord Jehovah, It shall come to pass in that day, that things will come up in thy heart, and thou wilt devise an evil design, Ezek 38:11. And say, I will go up into the open country, I will come upon the peaceful ones, who are all dwelling in safety, who dwell without walls, and have not bars and gates, Ezek 38:12. To take plunder and to gather spoil, to bring back thy hand against the ruins that are inhabited again, and against a people gathered out of the nations, carrying on trade and commerce, who dwell on the navel of the earth. Ezek 38:13. Sabaea and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, and all her young lions, will say to thee, Dost thou come to take plunder? Hast thou gathered thy multitude of people to take spoil? Is it to carry away gold and silver, to take possession and gain, to plunder a great spoil? Ezek 38:14. Therefore prophesy, son of man, and say to Gog, Thus saith the Lord Jehovah, Is it not so? On that day, when my people Israel dwelleth in security, thou wilt observe it, Ezek 38:15. And come from thy place from the extreme north, thou and many peoples with thee, all riding upon horses, a great crowd and a numerous army, Ezek 38:16. And wilt march against my people Israel, to cover the land like a cloud; at the end of the days it will take place; then shall I lead thee against my land, that the nations may know me, when I sanctify myself upon thee before their eyes, O Gog. - In Ezek 38:10 דּברים are not words, but things which come into his mind. What things these are, we learn from Ezek 38:11 and Ezek 38:12; but first of all, these things are described as evil thoughts or designs. Gog resolves to fall upon Israel, now living in peace and security, and dwelling in open unfortified places, and to rob and plunder it. ארץ , literally, land of plains, i.e., a land which has no fortified towns, but only places lying quite exposed (see the comm. on Zech 2:8); because its inhabitants are living in undisturbed peace and safe repose, and therefore dwell in places that have no walls with gates and bars (cf. Judg 18:7; Jer 49:31). This description of Israel's mode of life also points beyond the times succeeding the Babylonian captivity to the Messianic days, when the Lord will have destroyed the horses and war-chariots and fortresses (Mic 5:9), and Jerusalem will be inhabited as an open country because of the multitude of the men and cattle, and the Lord will be a wall of fire round about her (Zech 2:8-9). For Ezek 38:12, compare Is 10:6. להשׁיב ידך is not dependent upon אעלה, like the preceding infinitives, but is subordinate to אמרתּ אעלה וגו: "thou sayest, I will go up...to turn thy hand." השׁיב, to bring back, is to be explained from the fact that the heathen had already at an earlier period turned their hand against the towns of Israel, and plundered their possessions and goods. חרבות נושׁבות in this connection are desolate places which are inhabited again, and therefore have been rebuilt (cf. Ezek 12:20; Ezek 26:19). מקנה and קנין are synonyms; and מקנה does not mean flocks or herds, but gain, possession (cf. Gen 36:6; Gen 31:18; Gen 34:23). One motive of Gog for making the attack was to be found in the possessions of Israel; a second is given in the words: who dwell upon the navel of the earth. This figurative expression is to be explained from Ezek 5:5 : "Jerusalem in the midst of the nations." This navel is not a figure denoting the high land, but signifies the land situated in the middle of the earth, and therefore the land most glorious and most richly blessed; so that they who dwell there occupy the most exalted position among the nations. A covetous desire for the possessions of the people of God, and envy at his exalted position in the centre of the world, are therefore the motives by which Gog is impelled to enter upon his predatory expedition against the people living in the depth of peace. This covetousness is so great, that even the rich trading populations of Sabaea, Dedan, and Tarshish (cf. Ezek 27:22, Ezek 27:20, and Ezek 27:12) perceive it, and declare that it is this alone which has determined Gog to undertake his expedition. The words of these peoples (Ezek 38:13) are not to be taken as expressing their sympathies (Kliefoth), but serve to give prominence to the obvious thirst for booty which characterizes the multitude led by Gog. כּפיריה, their young lions, are the rapacious rulers of these trading communities, according to Ezek 19:3 and Ezek 32:2. - Ezek 38:14 introduces the announcement of the punishment, which consists of another summary account of the daring enterprise of Gog and his hosts (cf. Ezek 38:14, Ezek 38:15, and Ezek 38:16 with Ezek 38:4-9), and a clear statement of the design of God in leading him against His people and land. תּדע (Ezek 38:14, close), of which different renderings have been given, does not mean, thou wilt experience, or be aware of, the punishment; but the object is to be taken from the context: thou wilt know, or perceive, sc. that Israel dwells securely, not expecting any hostile invasion. The rendering of the lxx (ἐγερθήσῃ) does not furnish any satisfactory ground for altering תּדע into תער = תּעור (Ewald, Hitzig). With the words 'והביאותיך וגו (Ezek 38:16) the opening thought of the whole picture (Ezek 38:4) is resumed and defined with greater precision, for the purpose of attaching to it the declaration of the design of the Lord in bringing Gog, namely, to sanctify Himself upon him before the eyes of the nations (cf. Ezek 38:23 and Ezek 36:23).
Geneva 1599
38:10 Thus saith the Lord GOD; It shall also come to pass, [that] at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an (f) evil thought:
(f) That is, to molest and destroy the Church.
John Gill
38:10 Thus saith the Lord, it shall also come to pass,.... Who is the Lord God omniscient, and knows the thoughts of men's hearts afar off; which, though they are contingent and voluntary, yet certain to the foreknowledge of God; who knows them before they are conceived, and can foretell what they will be, and which come to pass accordingly: it is now above two thousand years ago since this was said, and as yet is not fulfilled, but certainly will be: that
at the same time shall things come into thy mind; when the Jews shall be in their own land, dwelling in great security; and when Gog or the Turk shall make preparation to disturb them, and shall enter into their land suddenly and furiously; many thoughts shall come into his mind, many schemes and devices, but not good ones:
and thou shall think an evil thought; to do mischief to the Jews; to disturb their peace, to dispossess them of their land, and plunder their substance.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:10 an evil thought--as to attacking God's people in their defenseless state.
38:1038:10: Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ անկանիցին բանք ՚ի սիրտ քո, եւ խորհեսցիս խորհուրդս չարս.
10 Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. “Այն օրը խոհեր են միտքդ գալու,
10 Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Այն օրը քու միտքդ բաներ պիտի գան ու չար խորհուրդ մը պիտի մտածես
Այսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ անկանիցին բանք ի սիրտ քո, եւ խորհեսցիս խորհուրդս չարս:

38:10: Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ անկանիցին բանք ՚ի սիրտ քո, եւ խորհեսցիս խորհուրդս չարս.
10 Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. “Այն օրը խոհեր են միտքդ գալու,
10 Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Այն օրը քու միտքդ բաներ պիտի գան ու չար խորհուրդ մը պիտի մտածես
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1038:10 Так говорит Господь Бог: в тот день придут тебе на сердце мысли, и ты задумаешь злое предприятие
38:11 καὶ και and; even ἐρεῖς ερεω.1 state; mentioned ἀναβήσομαι αναβαινω step up; ascend ἐπὶ επι in; on γῆν γη earth; land ἀπερριμμένην απορριπτω toss away ἥξω ηκω here ἐπὶ επι in; on ἡσυχάζοντας ησυχαζω tranquil; keep quiet ἐν εν in ἡσυχίᾳ ησυχια tranquility; quiet καὶ και and; even οἰκοῦντας οικεω dwell ἐπ᾿ επι in; on εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace πάντας πας all; every κατοικοῦντας κατοικεω settle γῆν γη earth; land ἐν εν in ᾗ ος who; what οὐχ ου not ὑπάρχει υπαρχω happen to be; belong τεῖχος τειχος wall οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither μοχλοί μοχλος and; even θύραι θυρα door οὐκ ου not εἰσὶν ειμι be αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him
38:11 וְ wᵊ וְ and אָמַרְתָּ֗ ʔāmartˈā אמר say אֶֽעֱלֶה֙ ʔˈeʕᵉleh עלה ascend עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אֶ֣רֶץ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth פְּרָזֹ֔ות pᵊrāzˈôṯ פְּרָזָה village אָבֹוא֙ ʔāvô בוא come הַ ha הַ the שֹּׁ֣קְטִ֔ים ššˈōqᵊṭˈîm שׁקט be at peace יֹשְׁבֵ֖י yōšᵊvˌê ישׁב sit לָ lā לְ to בֶ֑טַח vˈeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust כֻּלָּ֗ם kullˈām כֹּל whole יֹֽשְׁבִים֙ yˈōšᵊvîm ישׁב sit בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֵ֣ין ʔˈên אַיִן [NEG] חֹומָ֔ה ḥômˈā חֹומָה wall וּ û וְ and בְרִ֥יחַ vᵊrˌîₐḥ בְּרִיחַ bar וּ û וְ and דְלָתַ֖יִם ḏᵊlāṯˌayim דֶּלֶת door אֵ֥ין ʔˌên אַיִן [NEG] לָהֶֽם׃ lāhˈem לְ to
38:11. et dices ascendam ad terram absque muro veniam ad quiescentes habitantesque secure omnes habitant sine muro vectes et portae non sunt eisAnd thou shalt say: I will go up to the land which is without a wall, I will come to them that are at rest, and dwell securely: all these dwell without a wall, they have no bars nor gates:
11. and thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at quiet, that dwell securely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates:
Thus saith the Lord GOD; It shall also come to pass, [that] at the same time shall things come into thy mind, and thou shalt think an evil thought:

38:10 Так говорит Господь Бог: в тот день придут тебе на сердце мысли, и ты задумаешь злое предприятие
38:11
καὶ και and; even
ἐρεῖς ερεω.1 state; mentioned
ἀναβήσομαι αναβαινω step up; ascend
ἐπὶ επι in; on
γῆν γη earth; land
ἀπερριμμένην απορριπτω toss away
ἥξω ηκω here
ἐπὶ επι in; on
ἡσυχάζοντας ησυχαζω tranquil; keep quiet
ἐν εν in
ἡσυχίᾳ ησυχια tranquility; quiet
καὶ και and; even
οἰκοῦντας οικεω dwell
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace
πάντας πας all; every
κατοικοῦντας κατοικεω settle
γῆν γη earth; land
ἐν εν in
ᾗ ος who; what
οὐχ ου not
ὑπάρχει υπαρχω happen to be; belong
τεῖχος τειχος wall
οὐδὲ ουδε not even; neither
μοχλοί μοχλος and; even
θύραι θυρα door
οὐκ ου not
εἰσὶν ειμι be
αὐτοῖς αυτος he; him
38:11
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אָמַרְתָּ֗ ʔāmartˈā אמר say
אֶֽעֱלֶה֙ ʔˈeʕᵉleh עלה ascend
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אֶ֣רֶץ ʔˈereṣ אֶרֶץ earth
פְּרָזֹ֔ות pᵊrāzˈôṯ פְּרָזָה village
אָבֹוא֙ ʔāvô בוא come
הַ ha הַ the
שֹּׁ֣קְטִ֔ים ššˈōqᵊṭˈîm שׁקט be at peace
יֹשְׁבֵ֖י yōšᵊvˌê ישׁב sit
לָ lā לְ to
בֶ֑טַח vˈeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust
כֻּלָּ֗ם kullˈām כֹּל whole
יֹֽשְׁבִים֙ yˈōšᵊvîm ישׁב sit
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אֵ֣ין ʔˈên אַיִן [NEG]
חֹומָ֔ה ḥômˈā חֹומָה wall
וּ û וְ and
בְרִ֥יחַ vᵊrˌîₐḥ בְּרִיחַ bar
וּ û וְ and
דְלָתַ֖יִם ḏᵊlāṯˌayim דֶּלֶת door
אֵ֥ין ʔˌên אַיִן [NEG]
לָהֶֽם׃ lāhˈem לְ to
38:11. et dices ascendam ad terram absque muro veniam ad quiescentes habitantesque secure omnes habitant sine muro vectes et portae non sunt eis
And thou shalt say: I will go up to the land which is without a wall, I will come to them that are at rest, and dwell securely: all these dwell without a wall, they have no bars nor gates:
11. and thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at quiet, that dwell securely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
11. “Землю не огражденную” - букв. “землю из деревень”, без городов с их укреплениями. Будущая св. земля представляется в этом стихе лежащею в глубочайшем мире, не имеющею даже городов, а только деревни; ср. Зах VI:5, 8. Предсказание еще не исполнившееся. - “Пойду на беззаботных, живущих беспечно” слав. лучше (без оттенка осуждения): “приид на молчащые в тишине и живущыя мирно”.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:11: Unwalled villages - Compare Zac 2:4-5.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:11: go up: Exo 15:9; Psa 10:9; Pro 1:11-16; Isa 37:24, Isa 37:25; Rom 3:15
go to: Jdg 18:7, Jdg 18:27; Jer 49:31, Jer 49:32; Zac 2:4, Zac 2:5
safely: or, confidently, Eze 38:8; Pro 3:29, Pro 3:30
Geneva 1599
38:11 And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; (g) I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates,
(g) Meaning Israel, which had now been destroyed and was not yet built again: declaring by this the simplicity of the godly, who seek not so much to fortify themselves by outward force, as to depend on the providence and goodness of God.
John Gill
38:11 And thou shall say,.... What came into his mind, and what he thought of; this he shall say to his privy counsellors and ministers of state; or to the generals and officers of his army; or to his confederates and allies, and even to them all, to have their opinion and approbation of it; and to encourage them to join him, and go with him:
I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; a land which has nothing but villages in it, and those no walls about them to protect them: this he said by way of contempt; and the Septuagint and Arabic versions render it "the abject land"; and to observe how easily he could conquer it, there being nothing in his way to hinder him, or give him trouble:
I will go to them that are at rest, and dwell safely: as the Jews will do in the latter day, when they shall own and acknowledge the Messiah, Jer 23:5, and dwell in their own land, where they will be quiet and peaceable, and think and do no harm to any, nor mistrust their neighbours doing any harm to them; but shall live in the utmost tranquillity and security; and which Gog or the Turks will take the advantage of; and from hence promise themselves an easy conquest of them:
all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates; no walls to their cities; no gates to walls; nor bars to gates; but without either; being under the protection of God, and putting their trust in him, who is a wall of fire round about his people; and is better to them, than gates with bars.
John Wesley
38:11 Unwalled - Weak, and without any considerable defences.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:11 dwell safely--that is, securely, without fear of danger (compare Esther 9:19). Antiochus, the type of Antichrist, took Jerusalem without a blow.
38:1138:11: եւ ասասցես. Ելի՛ց ՚ի վերայ յապահով երկրին. հասի՛ց ՚ի վերայ հանդարտացելոցն յանհոգութեան, եւ բնակեցելոցն ՚ի խաղաղութեան, ամենեցուն որ բնակեալ են յերկրին. որոց ո՛չ պարիսպք եւ ո՛չ նիգք եւ ո՛չ դրունք[12909], [12909] Ոմանք. ՚Ի վերայ ապահով երկ՛՛... հանդարտելոցն յանհոգութեան եւ բնակելոցն ՚ի խա՛՛։
11 չար խորհուրդներ ես մտածելու եւ ասելու ես. ‘ Վեր կենամ ապահով երկրի վրայ, հասնեմ անհոգութեամբ հանգստացածների, խաղաղ ապրողների, բոլոր նրանց վրայ, ովքեր բնակւում են այն երկրում, որ ո՛չ պարիսպներ ունի, ո՛չ նիգեր, ո՛չ էլ դռներ.
11 Ու պիտի ըսես. «Անպարիսպ գիւղերուն երկիրը ելլեմ, հանգստութեան մէջ եղողներուն, ապահովութեամբ բնակողներուն վրայ երթամ. անոնք անպարիսպ տեղեր կը բնակին եւ նիգեր ու դռներ չունին»,
եւ ասասցես. Ելից ի վերայ յապահով երկրին, հասից ի վերայ հանդարտելոցն յանհոգութեան, բնակելոցն ի խաղաղութեան, ամենեցուն որ բնակեալ են յերկրին, որոց ոչ պարիսպք եւ ոչ նիգք եւ ոչ դրունք:

38:11: եւ ասասցես. Ելի՛ց ՚ի վերայ յապահով երկրին. հասի՛ց ՚ի վերայ հանդարտացելոցն յանհոգութեան, եւ բնակեցելոցն ՚ի խաղաղութեան, ամենեցուն որ բնակեալ են յերկրին. որոց ո՛չ պարիսպք եւ ո՛չ նիգք եւ ո՛չ դրունք[12909],
[12909] Ոմանք. ՚Ի վերայ ապահով երկ՛՛... հանդարտելոցն յանհոգութեան եւ բնակելոցն ՚ի խա՛՛։
11 չար խորհուրդներ ես մտածելու եւ ասելու ես. ‘ Վեր կենամ ապահով երկրի վրայ, հասնեմ անհոգութեամբ հանգստացածների, խաղաղ ապրողների, բոլոր նրանց վրայ, ովքեր բնակւում են այն երկրում, որ ո՛չ պարիսպներ ունի, ո՛չ նիգեր, ո՛չ էլ դռներ.
11 Ու պիտի ըսես. «Անպարիսպ գիւղերուն երկիրը ելլեմ, հանգստութեան մէջ եղողներուն, ապահովութեամբ բնակողներուն վրայ երթամ. անոնք անպարիսպ տեղեր կը բնակին եւ նիգեր ու դռներ չունին»,
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1138:11 и скажешь:
38:12 προνομεῦσαι προνομευω and; even σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil αὐτῶν αυτος he; him τοῦ ο the ἐπιστρέψαι επιστρεφω turn around; return χεῖρά χειρ hand σου σου of you; your εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the ἠρημωμένην ερημοω desolate; desert ἣ ος who; what κατῳκίσθη κατοικιζω settle καὶ και and; even ἐπ᾿ επι in; on ἔθνος εθνος nation; caste συνηγμένον συναγω gather ἀπὸ απο from; away ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste πολλῶν πολυς much; many πεποιηκότας ποιεω do; make κτήσεις κτησις settle ἐπὶ επι in; on τὸν ο the ὀμφαλὸν ομφαλος the γῆς γη earth; land
38:12 לִ li לְ to שְׁלֹ֥ל šᵊlˌōl שׁלל plunder שָׁלָ֖ל šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder וְ wᵊ וְ and לָ lā לְ to בֹ֣ז vˈōz בזז spoil בַּ֑ז bˈaz בַּז spoiling לְ lᵊ לְ to הָשִׁ֨יב hāšˌîv שׁוב return יָדְךָ֜ yāḏᵊḵˈā יָד hand עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon חֳרָבֹ֣ות ḥᵒrāvˈôṯ חָרְבָּה ruin נֹושָׁבֹ֗ת nôšāvˈōṯ ישׁב sit וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to עַם֙ ʕˌam עַם people מְאֻסָּ֣ף mᵊʔussˈāf אסף gather מִ mi מִן from גֹּויִ֔ם ggôyˈim גֹּוי people עֹשֶׂה֙ ʕōśˌeh עשׂה make מִקְנֶ֣ה miqnˈeh מִקְנֶה purchase וְ wᵊ וְ and קִנְיָ֔ן qinyˈān קִנְיָן property יֹשְׁבֵ֖י yōšᵊvˌê ישׁב sit עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon טַבּ֥וּר ṭabbˌûr טַבּוּר navel הָ hā הַ the אָֽרֶץ׃ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
38:12. ut diripias spolia et invadas praedam ut inferas manum tuam super eos qui deserti fuerant et postea restituti et super populum qui est congregatus ex gentibus qui possidere coepit et esse habitator umbilici terraeTo take spoils, and lay hold on the prey, to lay thy hand upon them that had been wasted, and afterwards restored, and upon the people that is gathered together out of the nations, which hath begun to possess and to dwell in the midst of the earth.
12. to take the spoil and to take the prey; to turn thine hand against the waste places that are inhabited, and against the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the middle of the earth.
And thou shalt say, I will go up to the land of unwalled villages; I will go to them that are at rest, that dwell safely, all of them dwelling without walls, and having neither bars nor gates:

38:11 и скажешь: <<поднимусь я на землю неогражденную, пойду на беззаботных, живущих беспечно, все они живут без стен, и нет у них ни запоров, ни дверей,
38:12
προνομεῦσαι προνομευω and; even
σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
τοῦ ο the
ἐπιστρέψαι επιστρεφω turn around; return
χεῖρά χειρ hand
σου σου of you; your
εἰς εις into; for
τὴν ο the
ἠρημωμένην ερημοω desolate; desert
ἣ ος who; what
κατῳκίσθη κατοικιζω settle
καὶ και and; even
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
ἔθνος εθνος nation; caste
συνηγμένον συναγω gather
ἀπὸ απο from; away
ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste
πολλῶν πολυς much; many
πεποιηκότας ποιεω do; make
κτήσεις κτησις settle
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὸν ο the
ὀμφαλὸν ομφαλος the
γῆς γη earth; land
38:12
לִ li לְ to
שְׁלֹ֥ל šᵊlˌōl שׁלל plunder
שָׁלָ֖ל šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder
וְ wᵊ וְ and
לָ lā לְ to
בֹ֣ז vˈōz בזז spoil
בַּ֑ז bˈaz בַּז spoiling
לְ lᵊ לְ to
הָשִׁ֨יב hāšˌîv שׁוב return
יָדְךָ֜ yāḏᵊḵˈā יָד hand
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
חֳרָבֹ֣ות ḥᵒrāvˈôṯ חָרְבָּה ruin
נֹושָׁבֹ֗ת nôšāvˈōṯ ישׁב sit
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
עַם֙ ʕˌam עַם people
מְאֻסָּ֣ף mᵊʔussˈāf אסף gather
מִ mi מִן from
גֹּויִ֔ם ggôyˈim גֹּוי people
עֹשֶׂה֙ ʕōśˌeh עשׂה make
מִקְנֶ֣ה miqnˈeh מִקְנֶה purchase
וְ wᵊ וְ and
קִנְיָ֔ן qinyˈān קִנְיָן property
יֹשְׁבֵ֖י yōšᵊvˌê ישׁב sit
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
טַבּ֥וּר ṭabbˌûr טַבּוּר navel
הָ hā הַ the
אָֽרֶץ׃ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
38:12. ut diripias spolia et invadas praedam ut inferas manum tuam super eos qui deserti fuerant et postea restituti et super populum qui est congregatus ex gentibus qui possidere coepit et esse habitator umbilici terrae
To take spoils, and lay hold on the prey, to lay thy hand upon them that had been wasted, and afterwards restored, and upon the people that is gathered together out of the nations, which hath begun to possess and to dwell in the midst of the earth.
12. to take the spoil and to take the prey; to turn thine hand against the waste places that are inhabited, and against the people that are gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the middle of the earth.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
12. “Руку” евр. “руку твою”, LXX “рку мою” (речь Гога). - “На вновь заселенные развалины”. Гог хочет опустошить страну, едва загладившую следы своих бедствий и прежних нападений. - “Занимающийся хозяйством и торговлею” слав. точнее: “сотворивших притяжания имений”; букв.: “обзавевшийся имением (михне) и добром”. Избранный народ благословленного будущего представляется земледельческим, а не торговым. В таинственном смысле это добродетели и дары Духа Св., которые антихрист и его слуги захотят отнять у христиан. - “На вершине” - слав точнее - “ппе”. См. объяснение V:5. Выражение впервые в Суд IX:37. Так Ханаан мог быть назван за свою гористость, а описываемая здесь таинственная обетованная земля будущего за красоту и обилие благословения Божия на ней. Выражение не чуждо и классич. писателям: Cic. с. Verrem VI, 48: De divinat. 2. Liv. XXXV, 18; Odys I, 50.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:12: To take a spoil - and a prey - When Antiochus took Jerusalem he gave the pillage of it to his soldiers, and spoiled the temple of its riches, which were immense. See Josephus War, B. 1. C. 1.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:12: take a spoil, and to take a prey: Heb. spoil the spoil, and to prey the prey, Eze 29:19 *marg. Isa 10:6; Jer 30:16
turn: Isa 1:24, Isa 1:25; Amo 1:8; Zac 13:7
the desolate: Eze 36:33-35; Jer 32:43, Jer 32:44, Jer 33:12, Jer 33:13; Zac 1:12, Zac 1:17
and upon: Eze 38:8; Zac 10:8-10
midst: Heb. navel, Jdg 9:37 *marg.
John Gill
38:12 To take a spoil, and to take a prey,.... These are the words of Gog continued; suggesting that he should have no occasion to fight; should have nothing else to do but to seize upon the goods and plunder the substance of these people:
to turn thine hand upon the desolate places that are now inhabited: such as were before desolate, and had lain long so, but now peopled and cultivated; these he would attack and demolish, and make a spoil and prey of:
and upon the people that are gathered out of the nations; a description of the Jews, as before; Ezek 38:8.
which have gotten cattle and goods; so that it should seem that Gog or the Turks will not immediately attack the Jews upon their possession of the land of Judea; but some time after, when they have settled in it, and have acquired much wealth and riches in cattle and goods, and then think to have a fine booty of them:
that dwell in the midst of the land; or, "the navel of the land" (p); which may design Jerusalem, situated in the midst of the land of Israel, and so called the navel of it, as that is in the midst of the body; as Enna is said by Cicero to be the navel of Sicily: or, as Kimchi thinks, the land of Israel itself is meant; which is in the midst of the world, and so the navel of it; though the former seems best.
(p) , Sept.; "in vel super umbilico terrae", Pagninus, Montanus, Cocceius, Starckius.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:12 midst of the land--literally, "the navel" of the land (Judg 9:37, Margin). So, in Ezek 5:5, Israel is said to be set "in the midst of the nations"; not physically, but morally, a central position for being a blessing to the world: so (as the favored or "beloved city," Rev_ 20:9) an object of envy. GROTIUS translates, "In the height of the land" (so Ezek 38:8), "the mountains of Israel," Israel being morally elevated above the rest of the world.
38:1238:12: աւարել զաւար, կողոպտել զկապուտ նոցա. արկանել զձեռն իմ ՚ի վերայ երկրին աւերելոյ՝ եւ բնակեցելոյ, եւ ՚ի վերայ ազգին ժողովելոյ յազգաց բազմաց. ստացելոց ինչս եւ դաստակերտս, բնակելոց ՚ի սիրտ երկրի[12910]։ [12910] Ոմանք. Աւերել զաւար... ստացելոյ ինչս։ Ոսկան. Եւ բնակելոյ՝ ՚ի վերայ ազ՛՛։
12 աւար առնեմ, կողոպտեմ նրանց ունեցուածքը, ձեռքս գցեմ աւերուած ու վերաբնակեցուած երկրի, բազում ժողովուրդների միջից հաւաքուած ազգի, ունեցուածք ու դաստակերտ ձեռք բերածների, երկրի սրտում ապրողների վրայ”:
12 Որպէս զի իբր աւար յափշտակես եւ կողոպտես եւ քու ձեռքդ՝ բնակուած եւ աւերուած տեղերու վրայ ու ազգերէն հաւաքուած եւ խաշինք ու ապրանք ստացած ու երկրին բարձր տեղերը բնակող ժողովուրդին վրայ դարձնես։
աւարել զաւար, կողոպտել զկապուտ նոցա, արկանել զձեռն [826]իմ ի վերայ երկրին աւերելոյ եւ բնակելոյ, եւ ի վերայ ազգին ժողովելոյ յազգաց բազմաց, ստացելոց ինչս եւ [827]դաստակերտս, բնակելոց ի սիրտ երկրի:

38:12: աւարել զաւար, կողոպտել զկապուտ նոցա. արկանել զձեռն իմ ՚ի վերայ երկրին աւերելոյ՝ եւ բնակեցելոյ, եւ ՚ի վերայ ազգին ժողովելոյ յազգաց բազմաց. ստացելոց ինչս եւ դաստակերտս, բնակելոց ՚ի սիրտ երկրի[12910]։
[12910] Ոմանք. Աւերել զաւար... ստացելոյ ինչս։ Ոսկան. Եւ բնակելոյ՝ ՚ի վերայ ազ՛՛։
12 աւար առնեմ, կողոպտեմ նրանց ունեցուածքը, ձեռքս գցեմ աւերուած ու վերաբնակեցուած երկրի, բազում ժողովուրդների միջից հաւաքուած ազգի, ունեցուածք ու դաստակերտ ձեռք բերածների, երկրի սրտում ապրողների վրայ”:
12 Որպէս զի իբր աւար յափշտակես եւ կողոպտես եւ քու ձեռքդ՝ բնակուած եւ աւերուած տեղերու վրայ ու ազգերէն հաւաքուած եւ խաշինք ու ապրանք ստացած ու երկրին բարձր տեղերը բնակող ժողովուրդին վրայ դարձնես։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1238:12 чтобы произвести грабеж и набрать добычи, наложить руку на вновь заселенные развалины и на народ, собранный из народов, занимающийся хозяйством и торговлею, живущий на вершине земли>>.
38:13 Σαβα σαβα and; even Δαιδαν δαιδαν and; even ἔμποροι εμπορος merchant Καρχηδόνιοι καρχηδονιοι and; even πᾶσαι πας all; every αἱ ο the κῶμαι κωμη village αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἐροῦσίν ερεω.1 state; mentioned σοι σοι you εἰς εις into; for προνομὴν προνομη the προνομεῦσαι προνομευω you ἔρχῃ ερχομαι come; go καὶ και and; even σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil συνήγαγες συναγω gather συναγωγήν συναγωγη gathering σου σου of you; your λαβεῖν λαμβανω take; get ἀργύριον αργυριον silver piece; money καὶ και and; even χρυσίον χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf ἀπενέγκασθαι αποφερω carry away / off κτῆσιν κτησις the σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil
38:13 שְׁבָ֡א šᵊvˈā שְׁבָא Sheba וּ֠ û וְ and דְדָן ḏᵊḏˌān דְּדָן Dedan וְ wᵊ וְ and סֹחֲרֵ֨י sōḥᵃrˌê סחר go about תַרְשִׁ֤ישׁ ṯaršˈîš תַּרְשִׁישׁ Tarshish וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole כְּפִרֶ֨יהָ֙ kᵊfirˈeʸhā כְּפִיר young lion יֹאמְר֣וּ yōmᵊrˈû אמר say לְךָ֔ lᵊḵˈā לְ to הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative] לִ li לְ to שְׁלֹ֤ל šᵊlˈōl שׁלל plunder שָׁלָל֙ šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder אַתָּ֣ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you בָ֔א vˈā בוא come הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative] לָ lā לְ to בֹ֥ז vˌōz בזז spoil בַּ֖ז bˌaz בַּז spoiling הִקְהַ֣לְתָּ hiqhˈaltā קהל assemble קְהָלֶ֑ךָ qᵊhālˈeḵā קָהָל assembly לָ lā לְ to שֵׂ֣את׀ śˈēṯ נשׂא lift כֶּ֣סֶף kˈesef כֶּסֶף silver וְ wᵊ וְ and זָהָ֗ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold לָ lā לְ to קַ֨חַת֙ qˈaḥaṯ לקח take מִקְנֶ֣ה miqnˈeh מִקְנֶה purchase וְ wᵊ וְ and קִנְיָ֔ן qinyˈān קִנְיָן property לִ li לְ to שְׁלֹ֖ל šᵊlˌōl שׁלל plunder שָׁלָ֥ל šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder גָּדֹֽול׃ ס gāḏˈôl . s גָּדֹול great
38:13. Seba et Dedan et negotiatores Tharsis et omnes leones eius dicent tibi numquid ad sumenda spolia tu venis ecce ad diripiendam praedam congregasti multitudinem tuam ut tollas argentum et aurum auferas supellectilem atque substantiam et diripias manubias infinitasSaba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tharsis, and all the lions thereof shall say to thee: Art thou come to take spoils? behold, thou hast gathered thy multitude to take a prey, to take silver, and gold, and to carry away goods and substance, and to take rich spoils.
13. Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish; with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art thou come to take the spoil? hast thou assembled thy company to take the prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take great spoil?
To take a spoil, and to take a prey; to turn thine hand upon the desolate places [that are now] inhabited, and upon the people [that are] gathered out of the nations, which have gotten cattle and goods, that dwell in the midst of the land:

38:12 чтобы произвести грабеж и набрать добычи, наложить руку на вновь заселенные развалины и на народ, собранный из народов, занимающийся хозяйством и торговлею, живущий на вершине земли>>.
38:13
Σαβα σαβα and; even
Δαιδαν δαιδαν and; even
ἔμποροι εμπορος merchant
Καρχηδόνιοι καρχηδονιοι and; even
πᾶσαι πας all; every
αἱ ο the
κῶμαι κωμη village
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
ἐροῦσίν ερεω.1 state; mentioned
σοι σοι you
εἰς εις into; for
προνομὴν προνομη the
προνομεῦσαι προνομευω you
ἔρχῃ ερχομαι come; go
καὶ και and; even
σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil
συνήγαγες συναγω gather
συναγωγήν συναγωγη gathering
σου σου of you; your
λαβεῖν λαμβανω take; get
ἀργύριον αργυριον silver piece; money
καὶ και and; even
χρυσίον χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf
ἀπενέγκασθαι αποφερω carry away / off
κτῆσιν κτησις the
σκυλεῦσαι σκυλευω spoil
38:13
שְׁבָ֡א šᵊvˈā שְׁבָא Sheba
וּ֠ û וְ and
דְדָן ḏᵊḏˌān דְּדָן Dedan
וְ wᵊ וְ and
סֹחֲרֵ֨י sōḥᵃrˌê סחר go about
תַרְשִׁ֤ישׁ ṯaršˈîš תַּרְשִׁישׁ Tarshish
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
כְּפִרֶ֨יהָ֙ kᵊfirˈeʸhā כְּפִיר young lion
יֹאמְר֣וּ yōmᵊrˈû אמר say
לְךָ֔ lᵊḵˈā לְ to
הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative]
לִ li לְ to
שְׁלֹ֤ל šᵊlˈōl שׁלל plunder
שָׁלָל֙ šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder
אַתָּ֣ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you
בָ֔א vˈā בוא come
הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative]
לָ lā לְ to
בֹ֥ז vˌōz בזז spoil
בַּ֖ז bˌaz בַּז spoiling
הִקְהַ֣לְתָּ hiqhˈaltā קהל assemble
קְהָלֶ֑ךָ qᵊhālˈeḵā קָהָל assembly
לָ lā לְ to
שֵׂ֣את׀ śˈēṯ נשׂא lift
כֶּ֣סֶף kˈesef כֶּסֶף silver
וְ wᵊ וְ and
זָהָ֗ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
לָ lā לְ to
קַ֨חַת֙ qˈaḥaṯ לקח take
מִקְנֶ֣ה miqnˈeh מִקְנֶה purchase
וְ wᵊ וְ and
קִנְיָ֔ן qinyˈān קִנְיָן property
לִ li לְ to
שְׁלֹ֖ל šᵊlˌōl שׁלל plunder
שָׁלָ֥ל šālˌāl שָׁלָל plunder
גָּדֹֽול׃ ס gāḏˈôl . s גָּדֹול great
38:13. Seba et Dedan et negotiatores Tharsis et omnes leones eius dicent tibi numquid ad sumenda spolia tu venis ecce ad diripiendam praedam congregasti multitudinem tuam ut tollas argentum et aurum auferas supellectilem atque substantiam et diripias manubias infinitas
Saba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tharsis, and all the lions thereof shall say to thee: Art thou come to take spoils? behold, thou hast gathered thy multitude to take a prey, to take silver, and gold, and to carry away goods and substance, and to take rich spoils.
13. Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish; with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art thou come to take the spoil? hast thou assembled thy company to take the prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take great spoil?
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
13. Самые торговые народы мира, смыслящие в богатствах, понимают, что одна жадность вооружила Гога и его народы и побуждает их к войне (Трош.). Дошедшие до них слухи о его грандиозном походе они стараются проверить на месте, чтобы извлечь пользу из его будущей богатой добычи; как поля сражения привлекают гиен (Креч.), так большие армии всегда тянут к себе толпы спекулянтов. Как войско Гога составлено из отдаленнейших народов, так и торговцы собираются в его армию со всех концов света (Сменд). - “Сава” см. объяснение XXVII:22. - “Дедан” - ХХVII:20. - “Купцы Фарсисские” - слав. “Кархиднстии” - XXVII:12. - “Молодыми львами” - совершенно неожиданное добавление; LXX должно быть перифраз: “и вся веси их”; Кречм. допускает в евр. кефирега повреждение киприм, Кипряне (П. п. IV:13; I:14).
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:13: Sheba, and Dedan - The Arabians, anciently great plunderers; and Tarshish, the inhabitants of the famous isle of Tartessus, the most noted merchants of the time. They are here represented as coming to Antiochus before he undertook the expedition, and bargaining for the spoils of the Jews. Art thou come to take a spoil, to carry away silver and gold, cattle and goods?
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:13: Sheba: Eze 27:12, Eze 27:15, Eze 27:20, Eze 27:22, Eze 27:23, Eze 27:25
with: Eze 19:3-6, Eze 32:2; Psa 57:4; Jer 50:17, Jer 51:38; Nah 2:11-13; Zac 11:3
Geneva 1599
38:13 Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, with all its young lions, shall say to thee, (h) Art thou come to take a spoil? hast thou gathered thy company to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil?
(h) One enemy will envy another because everyone will think to have the spoil of the Church.
John Gill
38:13 Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish,.... These are not any of the people that shall come along with Gog on his expedition; but some neighbouring nations bordering on Judea, who will address him in the following manner, as he passes through them, or by them. Sheba and Dedan design the Arabians inhabiting that part of Arabia which lay near to Judea, even Arabia Petraea and Felix; and the merchants of Tarshish are the Tyrians and Zidonians that traded by sea, as Tarshish sometimes signifies; or to Tartessus in Spain, where they had much traffic; and may design the people of those places that will at this time be living in Palestine, that trade by sea to foreign parts. The Septuagint and Arabic versions render it the "Carthaginian merchants", or "the merchants of Carthage":
with all the young lions thereof; which some interpret of sea pirates, for their cruelty and voraciousness. The Targum paraphrases it, all the kings thereof; and so Kimchi thinks kings and princes are meant; but the Septuagint version renders it, all their villages; and so the Syriac version, all the cities:
shall say unto thee, art thou come to take a spoil? either out of compassion to the people of the Jews; or rather by way of congratulation, and as expressive of joy at it; or else out of envy that they have no share in it; suggesting that they would gladly join with him, and partake of the booty:
hast thou gathered thy company together to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil? all which it is supposed might easily be done; only they might wonder that so rich a potentate as the Turk should give himself the trouble to raise such an army, and come so far, for cattle and goods, and silver and gold of which he had such plenty. Gog gives no answer, but God does.
John Wesley
38:13 Sheba - This Sheba was southward, and contains all of that coast which assisted Gog. Dedan - By these are noted, the eastern nations that assisted. Tarshish - The inhabitants of the sea - coast westward, and Magog north. The young lions - Young men thirsty of blood, but more of spoil, resolve to join, if they may rob and spoil for themselves. Art thou come - This repeated enquiry seems to be an agreement to come to his assistance, on condition they might have, possess, and carry away what they seize.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:13 Sheba, &c.--These mercantile peoples, though not taking an active part against the cause of God, are well pleased to see others do it. Worldliness makes them ready to deal in the ill-gotten spoil of the invaders of God's people. Gain is before godliness with them (1 Maccabees 3:41).
young lions--daring princes and leaders.
38:1338:13: Սաբա եւ Դեդան, եւ վաճառականք Կարքեդովնացւոց, եւ ամենայն աւանք նորա ասիցեն ցքեզ. Յա՛ռ յաւա՛ր արշաւեալ գաս. ժողովեցեր զժողովս քո առնուլ զարծաթ եւ զոսկի, վարե՛լ ՚ի գերութիւն զստացուածս, եւ կողոպտել զկապուտ մեծ[12911]։ [12911] Ոսկան. Առ յաւար արշաւեալ։ Ոմանք. Վարեալ ՚ի գերութեան։
13 Սաբան ու Դեդան, կարկեդոնացիների վաճառականները, բոլոր աւաններն ասելու են քեզ. “Արշաւում-գալիս ես աւար առնելու համար, ամբոխներ ես հաւաքել՝ արծաթն ու ոսկին վերցնելու, ունեցուածքները գերեվարելու, մեծ կողոպուտ կատարելու համար”:
13 Սաբան ու Դեդան եւ Թարսիսի վաճառականները ու անոր բոլոր առոյգ առիւծները քեզի պիտի ըսեն. ‘Միթէ աւար յափշտակելո՞ւ եկար. կողոպտելո՞ւ համար քու ժողովուրդդ հաւաքեցիր, որպէս զի արծաթ ու ոսկի վերցնես, խաշինք ու ապրանք առնես, մեծ աւար յափշտակես’։
Սաբա եւ Դեդան եւ վաճառականք [828]Կարքեդոնացւոց եւ ամենայն աւանք`` նորա ասիցեն ցքեզ. Յառ յաւա՞ր արշաւեալ գաս. ժողովեցեր զժողովս քո [829]առնուլ զարծաթ եւ զոսկի, վարել ի գերութիւն զստացուածս`` եւ կողոպտել զկապուտ մեծ:

38:13: Սաբա եւ Դեդան, եւ վաճառականք Կարքեդովնացւոց, եւ ամենայն աւանք նորա ասիցեն ցքեզ. Յա՛ռ յաւա՛ր արշաւեալ գաս. ժողովեցեր զժողովս քո առնուլ զարծաթ եւ զոսկի, վարե՛լ ՚ի գերութիւն զստացուածս, եւ կողոպտել զկապուտ մեծ[12911]։
[12911] Ոսկան. Առ յաւար արշաւեալ։ Ոմանք. Վարեալ ՚ի գերութեան։
13 Սաբան ու Դեդան, կարկեդոնացիների վաճառականները, բոլոր աւաններն ասելու են քեզ. “Արշաւում-գալիս ես աւար առնելու համար, ամբոխներ ես հաւաքել՝ արծաթն ու ոսկին վերցնելու, ունեցուածքները գերեվարելու, մեծ կողոպուտ կատարելու համար”:
13 Սաբան ու Դեդան եւ Թարսիսի վաճառականները ու անոր բոլոր առոյգ առիւծները քեզի պիտի ըսեն. ‘Միթէ աւար յափշտակելո՞ւ եկար. կողոպտելո՞ւ համար քու ժողովուրդդ հաւաքեցիր, որպէս զի արծաթ ու ոսկի վերցնես, խաշինք ու ապրանք առնես, մեծ աւար յափշտակես’։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1338:13 Сава и Дедан и купцы Фарсисские со всеми молодыми львами их скажут тебе: >
38:14 διὰ δια through; because of τοῦτο ουτος this; he προφήτευσον προφητευω prophesy υἱὲ υιος son ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human καὶ και and; even εἰπὸν επω say; speak τῷ ο the Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog τάδε οδε further; this λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master οὐκ ου not ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that ἐν εν in τῷ ο the κατοικισθῆναι κατοικιζω settle τὸν ο the λαόν λαος populace; population μου μου of me; mine Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ἐπ᾿ επι in; on εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace ἐγερθήσῃ εγειρω rise; arise
38:14 לָכֵן֙ lāḵˌēn לָכֵן therefore הִנָּבֵ֣א hinnāvˈē נבא speak as prophet בֶן־ ven- בֵּן son אָדָ֔ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind וְ wᵊ וְ and אָמַרְתָּ֣ ʔāmartˈā אמר say לְ lᵊ לְ to גֹ֔וג ḡˈôḡ גֹּוג Gog כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative] לֹ֣וא׀ lˈô לֹא not בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he בְּ bᵊ בְּ in שֶׁ֨בֶת šˌeveṯ ישׁב sit עַמִּ֧י ʕammˈî עַם people יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel לָ lā לְ to בֶ֖טַח vˌeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust תֵּדָֽע׃ tēḏˈāʕ ידע know
38:14. propterea vaticinare fili hominis et dices ad Gog haec dicit Dominus Deus numquid non in die illo cum habitaverit populus meus Israhel confidenter sciesTherefore, thou son of man, prophesy and say to Gog: Thus saith the Lord God: Shalt thou not know, in that day, when my people of Israel shall dwell securely?
14. Therefore, son of man, prophesy, and say unto Gog, Thus saith the Lord GOD: In that day when my people Israel dwelleth securely, shalt thou not know it?
Sheba, and Dedan, and the merchants of Tarshish, with all the young lions thereof, shall say unto thee, Art thou come to take a spoil? hast thou gathered thy company to take a prey? to carry away silver and gold, to take away cattle and goods, to take a great spoil:

38:13 Сава и Дедан и купцы Фарсисские со всеми молодыми львами их скажут тебе: <<ты пришел, чтобы произвести грабеж, собрал полчище твое, чтобы набрать добычи, взять серебро и золото, отнять скот и имущество, захватить большую добычу?>>
38:14
διὰ δια through; because of
τοῦτο ουτος this; he
προφήτευσον προφητευω prophesy
υἱὲ υιος son
ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human
καὶ και and; even
εἰπὸν επω say; speak
τῷ ο the
Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog
τάδε οδε further; this
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
οὐκ ου not
ἐν εν in
τῇ ο the
ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day
ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that
ἐν εν in
τῷ ο the
κατοικισθῆναι κατοικιζω settle
τὸν ο the
λαόν λαος populace; population
μου μου of me; mine
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
εἰρήνης ειρηνη peace
ἐγερθήσῃ εγειρω rise; arise
38:14
לָכֵן֙ lāḵˌēn לָכֵן therefore
הִנָּבֵ֣א hinnāvˈē נבא speak as prophet
בֶן־ ven- בֵּן son
אָדָ֔ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אָמַרְתָּ֣ ʔāmartˈā אמר say
לְ lᵊ לְ to
גֹ֔וג ḡˈôḡ גֹּוג Gog
כֹּ֥ה kˌō כֹּה thus
אָמַ֖ר ʔāmˌar אמר say
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
הֲ hᵃ הֲ [interrogative]
לֹ֣וא׀ lˈô לֹא not
בַּ ba בְּ in
† הַ the
יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day
הַ ha הַ the
ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
שֶׁ֨בֶת šˌeveṯ ישׁב sit
עַמִּ֧י ʕammˈî עַם people
יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
לָ lā לְ to
בֶ֖טַח vˌeṭaḥ בֶּטַח trust
תֵּדָֽע׃ tēḏˈāʕ ידע know
38:14. propterea vaticinare fili hominis et dices ad Gog haec dicit Dominus Deus numquid non in die illo cum habitaverit populus meus Israhel confidenter scies
Therefore, thou son of man, prophesy and say to Gog: Thus saith the Lord God: Shalt thou not know, in that day, when my people of Israel shall dwell securely?
14. Therefore, son of man, prophesy, and say unto Gog, Thus saith the Lord GOD: In that day when my people Israel dwelleth securely, shalt thou not know it?
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
14-16. Повторяется с некоторыми изменениями и дополнениями сказанное в 10-13: ст. “Ты узнаешь это”. LХХ “восстанеши” (вместо теда читали теор).
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:14: God will mark the prosperous security of the people, and rise up against them as an easy prey.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:14: in that: Isa 4:1, Isa 4:2
dwelleth: Eze 38:8, Eze 38:11; Jer 23:6; Zac 2:5, Zac 2:8
shalt: Eze 37:28
Geneva 1599
38:14 Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say to Gog, Thus saith the Lord GOD; In that day when my people of Israel (i) dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know [it]?
(i) Will you not spy your opportunity to come against my Church when they suspect nothing?
John Gill
38:14 Therefore, son of man, prophesy, and say unto Gog,.... Since these are his thoughts and designs, and those his big words, and which he will endeavour to put in practice, and be applauded for it by others; deliver this prophecy to him, or concerning him:
thus saith the Lord God, in that day when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, shall thou not know it? that Israel are returned to their own land? that they dwell in it safely? that they have abundance of cattle, gold, and silver that they have no walls, gates, and bars to protect them? that they live without fear or suspicion of any enemy to annoy them, and therefore may be easily surprised and taken? this, when it comes to pass, will soon be known by the Turks, through their spies and informers: or, "shall thou not know?" (q) or experience the divine vengeance for thy wicked thoughts, intentions, and attempts against Israel? he should. So the Targum,
"shalt thou not know the vengeance of my power?''
or shalt thou not know that all attempts to make them uneasy and uncomfortable will be in vain?
(q) "experturus esses", Junius & Tremellius; "experieris, scil. poenam meam", Piscator.
John Wesley
38:14 Know it - Thou wilt be informed of it.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:14 shalt thou not know it?--to thy cost, being visited with punishment, while Israel dwells safely.
38:1438:14: Վասն այնորիկ մարգարեա՛ց որդի մարդոյ, եւ ասասցես ցԳովգ. Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ոչ ապաքէն յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում բնակեսցէ ժողովուրդ իմ Իսրայէլ խաղաղութեամբ, զարթիցես
14 Ուստի մարգարէացի՛ր, մարդո՛ւ որդի, եւ ասա՛ Գոգին. “Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. ‘ Մի՞թէ այն օրը, երբ Իսրայէլի իմ ժողովուրդը խաղաղութեամբ ապրելիս լինի,
14 «Անոր համար մարգարէութիւն ըրէ՛, որդի՛ մարդոյ ու Գոգին ըսէ՛, Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Այն օրը, երբ իմ ժողովուրդս Իսրայէլը ապահովութեամբ բնակի՝ դուն պիտի իմանաս
Վասն այնորիկ մարգարեաց, որդի մարդոյ, եւ ասասցես ցԳովգ. Այսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ո՞չ ապաքէն յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում բնակեսցէ ժողովուրդ իմ Իսրայէլ խաղաղութեամբ` [830]զարթիցես:

38:14: Վասն այնորիկ մարգարեա՛ց որդի մարդոյ, եւ ասասցես ցԳովգ. Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ոչ ապաքէն յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում բնակեսցէ ժողովուրդ իմ Իսրայէլ խաղաղութեամբ, զարթիցես
14 Ուստի մարգարէացի՛ր, մարդո՛ւ որդի, եւ ասա՛ Գոգին. “Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած. ‘ Մի՞թէ այն օրը, երբ Իսրայէլի իմ ժողովուրդը խաղաղութեամբ ապրելիս լինի,
14 «Անոր համար մարգարէութիւն ըրէ՛, որդի՛ մարդոյ ու Գոգին ըսէ՛, Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. ‘Այն օրը, երբ իմ ժողովուրդս Իսրայէլը ապահովութեամբ բնակի՝ դուն պիտի իմանաս
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1438:14 Посему изреки пророчество, сын человеческий, и скажи Гогу: так говорит Господь Бог: не так ли? в тот день, когда народ Мой Израиль будет жить безопасно, ты узнаешь это;
38:15 καὶ και and; even ἥξεις ηκω here ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the τόπου τοπος place; locality σου σου of you; your ἀπ᾿ απο from; away ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part βορρᾶ βορρας north wind καὶ και and; even ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste πολλὰ πολυς much; many μετὰ μετα with; amid σοῦ σου of you; your ἀναβάται αναβατης horse πάντες πας all; every συναγωγὴ συναγωγη gathering μεγάλη μεγας great; loud καὶ και and; even δύναμις δυναμις power; ability πολλή πολυς much; many
38:15 וּ û וְ and בָ֤אתָ vˈāṯā בוא come מִ mi מִן from מְּקֹֽומְךָ֙ mmᵊqˈômᵊḵā מָקֹום place מִ mi מִן from יַּרְכְּתֵ֣י yyarkᵊṯˈê יַרְכָּה backside צָפֹ֔ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north אַתָּ֕ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you וְ wᵊ וְ and עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much אִתָּ֑ךְ ʔittˈāḵ אֵת together with רֹכְבֵ֤י rōḵᵊvˈê רכב ride סוּסִים֙ sûsîm סוּס horse כֻּלָּ֔ם kullˈām כֹּל whole קָהָ֥ל qāhˌāl קָהָל assembly גָּדֹ֖ול gāḏˌôl גָּדֹול great וְ wᵊ וְ and חַ֥יִל ḥˌayil חַיִל power רָֽב׃ rˈāv רַב much
38:15. et venies de loco tuo a lateribus aquilonis tu et populi multi tecum ascensores equorum universi coetus magnus et exercitus vehemensAnd thou shalt come out of thy place from the northern parts, thou and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company and a mighty army.
15. And thou shalt come from thy place out of the uttermost parts of the north, thou, and many peoples with thee, all of them riding upon horses; a great company and a mighty army:
Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, Thus saith the Lord GOD; In that day when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know:

38:14 Посему изреки пророчество, сын человеческий, и скажи Гогу: так говорит Господь Бог: не так ли? в тот день, когда народ Мой Израиль будет жить безопасно, ты узнаешь это;
38:15
καὶ και and; even
ἥξεις ηκω here
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
τόπου τοπος place; locality
σου σου of you; your
ἀπ᾿ απο from; away
ἐσχάτου εσχατος last; farthest part
βορρᾶ βορρας north wind
καὶ και and; even
ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste
πολλὰ πολυς much; many
μετὰ μετα with; amid
σοῦ σου of you; your
ἀναβάται αναβατης horse
πάντες πας all; every
συναγωγὴ συναγωγη gathering
μεγάλη μεγας great; loud
καὶ και and; even
δύναμις δυναμις power; ability
πολλή πολυς much; many
38:15
וּ û וְ and
בָ֤אתָ vˈāṯā בוא come
מִ mi מִן from
מְּקֹֽומְךָ֙ mmᵊqˈômᵊḵā מָקֹום place
מִ mi מִן from
יַּרְכְּתֵ֣י yyarkᵊṯˈê יַרְכָּה backside
צָפֹ֔ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
אַתָּ֕ה ʔattˈā אַתָּה you
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people
רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much
אִתָּ֑ךְ ʔittˈāḵ אֵת together with
רֹכְבֵ֤י rōḵᵊvˈê רכב ride
סוּסִים֙ sûsîm סוּס horse
כֻּלָּ֔ם kullˈām כֹּל whole
קָהָ֥ל qāhˌāl קָהָל assembly
גָּדֹ֖ול gāḏˌôl גָּדֹול great
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חַ֥יִל ḥˌayil חַיִל power
רָֽב׃ rˈāv רַב much
38:15. et venies de loco tuo a lateribus aquilonis tu et populi multi tecum ascensores equorum universi coetus magnus et exercitus vehemens
And thou shalt come out of thy place from the northern parts, thou and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company and a mighty army.
15. And thou shalt come from thy place out of the uttermost parts of the north, thou, and many peoples with thee, all of them riding upon horses; a great company and a mighty army:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
15. “От пределов севера”. Север - мрачная страна, символ источника всяких бедствий (см. объяснение I:4: “с севера”). С севера и евреи подвергались наибольшим ударам судьбы (см. предв. зам. к главе;). Это свойство севера с углублением в него, на краю его, усиливается. - “Все сидящие на конях”. Скифская конница удивляла Восток. “Сборище” - количественное определение, а “войско” (слав. “сила”) - качественное.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
14 Therefore, son of man, prophesy and say unto Gog, Thus saith the Lord GOD; In that day when my people of Israel dwelleth safely, shalt thou not know it? 15 And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts, thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company, and a mighty army: 16 And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes. 17 Thus saith the Lord GOD; Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days many years that I would bring thee against them? 18 And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord GOD, that my fury shall come up in my face. 19 For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel; 20 So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground. 21 And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man's sword shall be against his brother. 22 And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone. 23 Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I am the LORD.
This latter part of the chapter is a repetition of the former; the dream is doubled, for the thing is certain and to be very carefully regarded.
I. It is here again foretold that this spiteful enemy should make a formidable descent upon the land of Israel (v. 15): "Thou shalt come out of the north parts (Syria lay on the north of Canaan) with a mighty army, shalt come like a cloud, and cover the land of my people Israel," v. 16. These words (v. 14), When my people Israel dwell safely, shalt thou not know it? may be taken two ways:-- 1. As intimating his inducements to this attempt. "Thou shalt have intelligence brought thee how securely, and therefore how carelessly, the people of Israel dwell, which shall give rise to thy project against them; for when thou knowest not only what a rich, but what an easy prey they are likely to be, thou wilt soon determine to fall upon them" Note, God's providence is to be acknowledged in the occasion, the small occasion perhaps, that is given, and that not designedly neither, to those first thoughts from which great enterprises take their original. God, to bring about his own purposes, lets men know that which yet he knows they will make a bad use of, as here. Or, 2. As intimating his disappointment in this attempt, which here, as before, the prophecy begins with: "When my people Israel dwell safely, not in their own apprehension only, but in reality, forasmuch as they dwell safely under the divine protection, shalt not thou be made to know it by the fruitlessness of thy endeavours to destroy them?" Thou shalt soon find that there is no enchantment against Jacob, that no weapon formed against them shall prosper; thou shalt know to thy cost, shalt know to thy shame, that though they have no walls, nor bars, nor gates, they have God himself, a wall of fire, round about them, and that he who touches them touches the apple of his eye; whosoever meddles with them meddles to his own hurt. And it is for the demonstrating of this to all the world that God will bring this mighty enemy against his people. Those that gathered themselves against Israel said, Let us take the spoil and take they prey, but they knew not the thoughts of the Lord, Mic. iv. 11, 12. I will bring thee against my land. This is strange news, that God will not only permit his enemies to come against his own children, but will himself bring them; but, if we understand what he aims at, we shall be well reconciled even to this: it is "that the heathen may know me to be the only living and true God when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog! that is, in thy defeat and destruction before their eyes, that all the nations may see, and say, There is none like unto the God of Jeshurun, that rides on the heavens for the help of his people." Note, God brings his people into danger and distress that he may have the honour of bringing about their deliverance, and suffers the enemies of his church to prevail awhile, though they profane his name by their sin, that he may have the honour of prevailing at last and sanctifying his own name in their ruin. Now it is said, This shall be in the latter days, namely, in the latter days of the Old-Testament church; so the mischief that Antiochus did to Israel was; but in the latter days of the New-Testament church another like enemy should arise, that should in like manner be defeated. Note, Effectual securities are treasured up in the word of God against the troubles and dangers the church may be brought into a great while hence, even in the latter days.
II. Reference is herein had to the predictions of the former prophets (v. 17): Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time, of whom Moses spoke in his prophecy of the latter days (Deut. xxxii. 43, He will render vengeance to his adversaries), and David, Ps. ix. 15 (The heathen are sunk down into the pit that they made) and often elsewhere in the Psalms? This is the leviathan of whom Isaiah spoke (Isa. xxvii. 1), that congress of the nations of which Joel spoke, Joel iii. 1. Many of the prophets had perhaps spoken particularly of this event, though it be not written, as they all had spoken and written too that which is applicable to it. Note, There is an amiable admirable harmony and agreement between the Lord's prophets, though they lived in several ages, for they were all guided by one and the same Spirit.
III. It is here foretold that this furious formidable enemy should be utterly cut off in this attempt upon Israel, and that it should issue in his own ruin. This is supposed by many to have its accomplishment in the many defeats given by the Maccabees to the forces of Antiochus and the remarkable judgments of God executed upon his own person, for he died of sore diseases. But these things are here foretold, as usual, in figurative expressions, which we are not to look for the literal accomplishment of, and yet they might be fulfilled nearer the letter than we know of. 1. God will be highly displeased with this bold invader: When he comes up in pride and anger against the land of Israel, and thinks to carry all before him with a high hand, then God's fury shall come up in his face, which is an allusion to the manner of men, whose colour rises in their faces when some high affront is offered them and they are resolved to show their resentment of it, v. 18. God will speak against them in his jealousy for his people and in the fire of his wrath against his and their enemies, v. 19. See how God's permitting sin, his laying occasions of sin before men, and his making use of it to serve his own purposes, consist with his hatred of sin and his displeasure against it. God brings this enemy against his land, letting him know what an easy prey it might be and determining thereby to glorify himself; and yet, when he comes against the land, God's fury comes up, and he speaks to him in the fire of his wrath. If any ask, Why does he thus find fault? for who has resisted his will? It is easy to answer, Nay, but, O man! who art thou that repliest against God? 2. His forces shall be put into the greatest confusion and consternation imaginable (v. 19): There shall be a great shaking of them in the land of Israel, a universal concussion (v. 20), such as shall affect the fishes and fowls, the beasts and creeping things, and much more the men that are upon the face of the earth, who sooner receive impressions of fear. There shall be such an earthquake as shall throw down the mountains, those natural heights, and the steep places, towers and walls, those artificial heights; they shall all fall to the ground. Some understand this of the fright which the land of Israel should be put into by the fury of the enemy. But it is rather to be understood of the fright which the enemy should be put into by the wrath of God; all those things which they both raise themselves and stay themselves upon shall be shaken down, and their hearts shall fail them. 3. He shall be routed and utterly ruined; both earth and heaven shall be armed against him (1.) The earth shall muster up its forces to destroy him. If the people of Israel have not strength and courage to resist him, God will call for a sword against him, v. 21. And he has swords always at command, that are bathed in heaven, Isa. xxxv. 5. Throughout all the mountains of Israel, where he hoped to meet with spoil to enrich him, he shall meet with swords to destroy him, and, rather than fail, every man's sword shall be against his brother, as in the day of Midian, Ps. lxxxiii. 9. The great men of Syria shall undermine and overthrow one another, shall accuse one another, shall fight duels with one another. Note, God can, and often does, make the destroyers of his people to be their own destroyers and the destroyers of one another. However, he will himself be their destroyer, will take the work into his own hand, that it may be done thoroughly (v. 22): I will plead against him with pestilence and blood. Note, Whom God acts against he pleads against; he shows them the ground of his controversy with them, that their mouths may be stopped, and he may be clear when he judges. (2.) The artillery of heaven shall also be drawn out against them: I will rain upon him an overflowing rain, v. 22. He comes like a storm upon Israel, v. 9. But God will come like a storm upon him, will rain upon him great hailstones as upon the Canaanites (Josh. x. 11), fire and brimstone as upon Sodom, and a horrible tempest, Ps. xi. 6. Thus the Gog and Magog in the New Testament shall be devoured with fire from heaven, and cast into the lake of brimstone, Rev. xx. 9, 10. That will be the everlasting portion of all the impenitent implacable enemies of God's church and people. 4. God, in all this, will be glorified. The end he aimed at (v. 16) shall be accomplished (v. 23): Thus will I magnify myself and sanctify myself. Note, In the destruction of sinners God makes it to appear that he is a great and holy God, and he will do so to eternity. And, if men do not magnify and sanctify him as they ought, he will magnify himself, and sanctify himself; and this we should desire and pray for daily, Father, glorify thy own name.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:15: thy place: Eze 39:2; Dan 11:40
and many: Eze 38:4, Eze 38:6; Joe 3:2; Zep 3:8; Zac 12:2-4, Zac 14:2, Zac 14:3; Rev 16:14, Rev 16:16, Rev 20:8
John Gill
38:15 And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts,.... Whose original was from Scythia, or Cathaia in Tartary, that lies to the north of China; and who will bring with him many people from the Euxine and Caspian seas, and from the northern parts of lesser Asia; and the Turk is, by many interpreters, thought to be the king of the north, in Dan 11:44 as before observed:
thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses; the Turkish armies consisting chiefly of horse, as has been observed on Ezek 38:4,
a great company, and a mighty army; for quantity many, for quality strong and mighty. The Targum is,
"many armies, and much people;''
the Turks usually have large armies; See Gill on Ezek 38:4.
John Wesley
38:15 The north parts - From Scythia, from the Euxine and Caspian seas, and countries thereabouts.
38:1538:15: եւ եկեսցես ՚ի տեղւոջէ քումմէ ՚ի ծագաց հիւսւսոյ, դո՛ւ եւ բազում ազգք ընդ քեզ հեծեալ յերիվարս. ամենեքին ընդ գունդս բազումս զօրաց բազմաց։
15 դու զարթնելու ու գալու ես քո տեղից՝ հիւսիսի կողմերից, դու եւ քեզ հետ՝ երիվարներ հեծած բազմաթիւ ժողովուրդներ, բոլորն էլ բազում եւ բազում զօրագնդեր կազմած:
15 Քու տեղէդ՝ հիւսիսի ծայրերէն՝ պիտի գաս, դուն ու քեզի հետ շատ ժողովուրդներ՝ ամէնքը ձիեր հեծած, մեծ բազմութեամբ ու շատ զօրքով
եւ եկեսցես ի տեղւոջէ քումմէ ի ծագաց հիւսիսոյ, դու եւ բազում ազգք ընդ քեզ հեծեալ յերիվարս, ամենեքին ընդ գունդս բազումս զօրաց բազմաց:

38:15: եւ եկեսցես ՚ի տեղւոջէ քումմէ ՚ի ծագաց հիւսւսոյ, դո՛ւ եւ բազում ազգք ընդ քեզ հեծեալ յերիվարս. ամենեքին ընդ գունդս բազումս զօրաց բազմաց։
15 դու զարթնելու ու գալու ես քո տեղից՝ հիւսիսի կողմերից, դու եւ քեզ հետ՝ երիվարներ հեծած բազմաթիւ ժողովուրդներ, բոլորն էլ բազում եւ բազում զօրագնդեր կազմած:
15 Քու տեղէդ՝ հիւսիսի ծայրերէն՝ պիտի գաս, դուն ու քեզի հետ շատ ժողովուրդներ՝ ամէնքը ձիեր հեծած, մեծ բազմութեամբ ու շատ զօրքով
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1538:15 и пойдешь с места твоего, от пределов севера, ты и многие народы с тобою, все сидящие на конях, сборище великое и войско многочисленное.
38:16 καὶ και and; even ἀναβήσῃ αναβαινω step up; ascend ἐπὶ επι in; on τὸν ο the λαόν λαος populace; population μου μου of me; mine Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ὡς ως.1 as; how νεφέλη νεφελη cloud καλύψαι καλυπτω cover γῆν γη earth; land ἐπ᾿ επι in; on ἐσχάτων εσχατος last; farthest part τῶν ο the ἡμερῶν ημερα day ἔσται ειμι be καὶ και and; even ἀνάξω αναγω lead up; head up σε σε.1 you ἐπὶ επι in; on τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land μου μου of me; mine ἵνα ινα so; that γνῶσιν γινωσκω know πάντα πας all; every τὰ ο the ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste ἐμὲ εμε me ἐν εν in τῷ ο the ἁγιασθῆναί αγιαζω hallow με με me ἐν εν in σοὶ σοι you ἐνώπιον ενωπιος in the face; facing αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
38:16 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָלִ֨יתָ֙ ʕālˈîṯā עלה ascend עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon עַמִּ֣י ʕammˈî עַם people יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel כֶּֽ kˈe כְּ as † הַ the עָנָ֖ן ʕānˌān עָנָן cloud לְ lᵊ לְ to כַסֹּ֣ות ḵassˈôṯ כסה cover הָ hā הַ the אָ֑רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אַחֲרִ֨ית ʔaḥᵃrˌîṯ אַחֲרִית end הַ ha הַ the יָּמִ֜ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day תִּֽהְיֶ֗ה tˈihyˈeh היה be וַ wa וְ and הֲבִאֹותִ֨יךָ֙ hᵃviʔôṯˈîḵā בוא come עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אַרְצִ֔י ʔarṣˈî אֶרֶץ earth לְמַעַן֩ lᵊmaʕˌan לְמַעַן because of דַּ֨עַת dˌaʕaṯ ידע know הַ ha הַ the גֹּויִ֜ם ggôyˈim גֹּוי people אֹתִ֗י ʔōṯˈî אֵת [object marker] בְּ bᵊ בְּ in הִקָּדְשִׁ֥י hiqqoḏšˌî קדשׁ be holy בְךָ֛ vᵊḵˈā בְּ in לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵינֵיהֶ֖ם ʕênêhˌem עַיִן eye גֹּֽוג׃ ס gˈôḡ . s גֹּוג Gog
38:16. et ascendes super populum meum Israhel quasi nubes ut operias terram in novissimis diebus eris et adducam te super terram meam ut sciant gentes me cum sanctificatus fuero in te in oculis eorum o GogAnd thou shalt come upon my people of Israel like a cloud, to cover the earth. Thou shalt be in the latter days, and I will bring thee upon my land: that the nations may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.
16. and thou shalt come up against my people Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall come to pass in the latter days, that I will bring thee against my land, that the nations may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.
And thou shalt come from thy place out of the north parts, thou, and many people with thee, all of them riding upon horses, a great company, and a mighty army:

38:15 и пойдешь с места твоего, от пределов севера, ты и многие народы с тобою, все сидящие на конях, сборище великое и войско многочисленное.
38:16
καὶ και and; even
ἀναβήσῃ αναβαινω step up; ascend
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὸν ο the
λαόν λαος populace; population
μου μου of me; mine
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
ὡς ως.1 as; how
νεφέλη νεφελη cloud
καλύψαι καλυπτω cover
γῆν γη earth; land
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
ἐσχάτων εσχατος last; farthest part
τῶν ο the
ἡμερῶν ημερα day
ἔσται ειμι be
καὶ και and; even
ἀνάξω αναγω lead up; head up
σε σε.1 you
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὴν ο the
γῆν γη earth; land
μου μου of me; mine
ἵνα ινα so; that
γνῶσιν γινωσκω know
πάντα πας all; every
τὰ ο the
ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste
ἐμὲ εμε me
ἐν εν in
τῷ ο the
ἁγιασθῆναί αγιαζω hallow
με με me
ἐν εν in
σοὶ σοι you
ἐνώπιον ενωπιος in the face; facing
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
38:16
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָלִ֨יתָ֙ ʕālˈîṯā עלה ascend
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
עַמִּ֣י ʕammˈî עַם people
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
כֶּֽ kˈe כְּ as
† הַ the
עָנָ֖ן ʕānˌān עָנָן cloud
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כַסֹּ֣ות ḵassˈôṯ כסה cover
הָ hā הַ the
אָ֑רֶץ ʔˈāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אַחֲרִ֨ית ʔaḥᵃrˌîṯ אַחֲרִית end
הַ ha הַ the
יָּמִ֜ים yyāmˈîm יֹום day
תִּֽהְיֶ֗ה tˈihyˈeh היה be
וַ wa וְ and
הֲבִאֹותִ֨יךָ֙ hᵃviʔôṯˈîḵā בוא come
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אַרְצִ֔י ʔarṣˈî אֶרֶץ earth
לְמַעַן֩ lᵊmaʕˌan לְמַעַן because of
דַּ֨עַת dˌaʕaṯ ידע know
הַ ha הַ the
גֹּויִ֜ם ggôyˈim גֹּוי people
אֹתִ֗י ʔōṯˈî אֵת [object marker]
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
הִקָּדְשִׁ֥י hiqqoḏšˌî קדשׁ be holy
בְךָ֛ vᵊḵˈā בְּ in
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֵינֵיהֶ֖ם ʕênêhˌem עַיִן eye
גֹּֽוג׃ ס gˈôḡ . s גֹּוג Gog
38:16. et ascendes super populum meum Israhel quasi nubes ut operias terram in novissimis diebus eris et adducam te super terram meam ut sciant gentes me cum sanctificatus fuero in te in oculis eorum o Gog
And thou shalt come upon my people of Israel like a cloud, to cover the earth. Thou shalt be in the latter days, and I will bring thee upon my land: that the nations may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.
16. and thou shalt come up against my people Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall come to pass in the latter days, that I will bring thee against my land, that the nations may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
16. “Как туча” - см. объяснение ст. 9. - “В последние дни”, см. объяснение ст. 8. - “Я приведу тебя”. Помимо своего желания Гог выполнит и волю Божию. - “Явлю святость Мою” - объяснение выражения: “чтобы народы узнали Меня”. Через уничтожение Гога (высшее воплощение зла) Бог откроет себя миру со стороны святости, главного свойства своего, так, как не открывал еще до сих пор. Тогда по истине вполне узнают Бога.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:16: When I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog - By the defeat of his troops under Lysias, his general. 1 Maccabees 3:32, 33, etc., and 6:6.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:16: I shall be sanctified in thee - I shall be shown to be holy and just in avenging Myself of Mine enemy.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:16: as a cloud: Eze 38:9
it shall be: Though it is not generally agreed what people or transactions are here predicted, yet it seems evident that the prophecy is not yet accomplished. Nothing occurred in the wars of Cambyses, or Antiochus Epiphanes with the Jews, that answers to it; and the expression here used, in the latter days, plainly implies that there should be a succession of many ages between the publication of the prediction and its accomplishment. It is therefore supposed, with much probability, that its fulfilment will be posterior to the conversion of the Jews and their restoration to their own land; and that the Turks, Tarters, or Scythians, from the northern parts of Asia, perhaps uniting with the inhabitants of some more southern regions, will make war upon the Jews and be cut off in a manner predicted here. Eze 38:8; Deu 31:29; Isa 2:2; Dan 2:28, Dan 10:14; Hos 3:5; Mic 4:1; Ti1 4:1; Ti2 3:1
that the: Eze 38:23, Eze 36:23, Eze 39:21; Exo 14:4; Sa1 17:45-47; Kg2 19:19; Psa 83:17, Psa 83:18; Dan 3:24-29, Dan 4:32-37, Dan 6:15-27; Mic 7:15-17; Mat 6:9, Mat 6:10
Geneva 1599
38:16 And thou shalt come against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the (k) latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the nations may know me, when I (l) shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes.
(k) Meaning in the last age, and from the coming of Christ to the end of the world.
(l) Signifying that God will be sanctified by maintaining his church, and destroying his enemies, as in (Ezek 36:23, Ezek 37:28).
John Gill
38:16 And thou shall come up against my people of Israel,.... Which is repeated for the certainty of it; and not for his comfort, but his ruin; not to the terror of Israel, but for the glory of God:
as a cloud to cover the land; the land of Israel, so great should be his army; See Gill on Ezek 38:9,
Tit shall be in the latter days; of the Gospel state, or kingdom of the Messiah, when the Jews shall be converted, and are returned to their own land, Hos 3:5,
and I will bring thee against my land; not to possess it, nor to hurt it, or to any injury to the people of it: but
that the Heathen may know me; the Pagan kingdoms of China, and others; who by God's judgments on the Turks will come to the knowledge of the true God, and acknowledge him, and will become the kingdoms of our Lord, and of his Christ, Rev_ 11:15,
when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes; that is, when God shall appear to be a holy and just God, in inflicting deserved punishment on the enemies of his people; when his omniscience and omnipotence, his power and faithfulness, and other perfections of his will be displayed, in fulfilling those prophecies concerning Gog or the Turks; infidels will be convinced of the truth of divine revelation; of the God of Israel being the true God; of Jesus being the Messiah; and of the Christian religion being of God, and shall profess the same. The, Targum is,
"that the people may know the vengeance of my power, when I shall be sanctified in thee, who shall see thy vengeance, O Gog.''
John Wesley
38:16 I will bring - I will permit thee to come. Sanctified - Confessed to be a great God over all, a gracious and faithful God to his people, and a dreadful enemy and avenger against the wicked. Before - ln the sight of all the heathen that are with Gog, and much more in the sight of God's own people.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:16 I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me--So in Ex 9:16, God tells Pharaoh, "For this cause have I raised thee up, for to show in thee My power; and that My name may be declared throughout all the earth."
38:1638:16: Եւ ելանիցես ՚ի վերայ ժողովրդեան իմոյ Իսրայէլի՝ իբրեւ զա՛մպ ծածկեալ զերկիրն. ՚ի յետին ժամանակի եղիցի այն. եւ ածից զքեզ յերկիր իմ, զի ծանիցեն զիս ամենայն ազգք, ՚ի լինել ինձ սուրբ ՚ի միջի քում առաջի նոցա[12912]։ [12912] Ոմանք. Յետին ժամանակի եղիցի... եւ ծանիցեն զիս ամենայն։ Ոսկան յաւելու. ՚Ի միջի քում առաջի նոցա գօգ։
16 Դու վեր ես կենալու Իսրայէլի իմ ժողովրդի դէմ՝ ամպի նման ծածկելու երկիրը: Եւ դա լինելու է վերջին ժամանակներում. ես քեզ բերելու եմ իմ երկիրը, որ բոլոր ազգերն ինձ ճանաչեն, երբ սրբանամ քո մէջ, նրանց առաջ‘“:
16 Եւ իմ ժողովուրդիս՝ Իսրայէլին վրայ ամպի պէս երկիրը պիտի ծածկես։ Ասիկա վերջին օրերը պիտի ըլլայ ու քեզ իմ երկրիս վրայ պիտի բերեմ, որպէս զի ազգերը զիս ճանչնան, երբ ես անոնց աչքերուն առջեւ քեզմով փառաւորուիմ*, ո՛վ Գոգ’»։
եւ ելանիցես ի վերայ ժողովրդեան իմոյ Իսրայելի` իբրեւ զամպ ծածկեալ զերկիրն. ի յետին ժամանակի եղիցի այն. եւ ածից զքեզ յերկիր իմ, զի ծանիցեն զիս ամենայն ազգք, ի լինել ինձ սուրբ ի միջի քում առաջի նոցա, Գովք:

38:16: Եւ ելանիցես ՚ի վերայ ժողովրդեան իմոյ Իսրայէլի՝ իբրեւ զա՛մպ ծածկեալ զերկիրն. ՚ի յետին ժամանակի եղիցի այն. եւ ածից զքեզ յերկիր իմ, զի ծանիցեն զիս ամենայն ազգք, ՚ի լինել ինձ սուրբ ՚ի միջի քում առաջի նոցա[12912]։
[12912] Ոմանք. Յետին ժամանակի եղիցի... եւ ծանիցեն զիս ամենայն։ Ոսկան յաւելու. ՚Ի միջի քում առաջի նոցա գօգ։
16 Դու վեր ես կենալու Իսրայէլի իմ ժողովրդի դէմ՝ ամպի նման ծածկելու երկիրը: Եւ դա լինելու է վերջին ժամանակներում. ես քեզ բերելու եմ իմ երկիրը, որ բոլոր ազգերն ինձ ճանաչեն, երբ սրբանամ քո մէջ, նրանց առաջ‘“:
16 Եւ իմ ժողովուրդիս՝ Իսրայէլին վրայ ամպի պէս երկիրը պիտի ծածկես։ Ասիկա վերջին օրերը պիտի ըլլայ ու քեզ իմ երկրիս վրայ պիտի բերեմ, որպէս զի ազգերը զիս ճանչնան, երբ ես անոնց աչքերուն առջեւ քեզմով փառաւորուիմ*, ո՛վ Գոգ’»։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1638:16 И поднимешься на народ Мой, на Израиля, как туча, чтобы покрыть землю: это будет в последние дни, и Я приведу тебя на землю Мою, чтобы народы узнали Меня, когда Я над тобою, Гог, явлю святость Мою пред глазами их.
38:17 τάδε οδε further; this λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master κύριος κυριος lord; master τῷ ο the Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog σὺ συ you εἶ ειμι be περὶ περι about; around οὗ ος who; what ἐλάλησα λαλεω talk; speak πρὸ προ before; ahead of ἡμερῶν ημερα day τῶν ο the ἔμπροσθεν εμπροσθεν in front; before διὰ δια through; because of χειρὸς χειρ hand τῶν ο the δούλων δουλος subject μου μου of me; mine προφητῶν προφητης prophet τοῦ ο the Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel ἐν εν in ταῖς ο the ἡμέραις ημερα day ἐκείναις εκεινος that καὶ και and; even ἔτεσιν ετος year τοῦ ο the ἀγαγεῖν αγω lead; pass σε σε.1 you ἐπ᾿ επι in; on αὐτούς αυτος he; him
38:17 כֹּֽה־ kˈō- כֹּה thus אָמַ֞ר ʔāmˈar אמר say אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֗ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH הַֽ hˈa הֲ [interrogative] אַתָּה־ ʔattā- אַתָּה you ה֨וּא hˌû הוּא he אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative] דִּבַּ֜רְתִּי dibbˈartî דבר speak בְּ bᵊ בְּ in יָמִ֣ים yāmˈîm יֹום day קַדְמֹונִ֗ים qaḏmônˈîm קַדְמֹנִי eastern בְּ bᵊ בְּ in יַד֙ yˌaḏ יָד hand עֲבָדַי֙ ʕᵃvāḏˌay עֶבֶד servant נְבִיאֵ֣י nᵊvîʔˈê נָבִיא prophet יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel הַֽ hˈa הַ the נִּבְּאִ֛ים nnibbᵊʔˈîm נבא speak as prophet בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יָּמִ֥ים yyāmˌîm יֹום day הָ hā הַ the הֵ֖ם hˌēm הֵם they שָׁנִ֑ים šānˈîm שָׁנָה year לְ lᵊ לְ to הָבִ֥יא hāvˌî בוא come אֹתְךָ֖ ʔōṯᵊḵˌā אֵת [object marker] עֲלֵיהֶֽם׃ ס ʕᵃlêhˈem . s עַל upon
38:17. haec dicit Dominus Deus tu ergo ille es de quo locutus sum in diebus antiquis in manu servorum meorum prophetarum Israhel qui prophetaverunt in diebus illorum temporum ut adducerem te super eosThus saith the Lord God: Thou then art he, of whom I have spoken in the days of old, by my servants the prophets of Israel, who prophesied in the days of those times that I would bring thee upon them.
17. Thus saith the Lord GOD: Art thou he of whom I spake in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days for years that I would bring thee against them?
And thou shalt come up against my people of Israel, as a cloud to cover the land; it shall be in the latter days, and I will bring thee against my land, that the heathen may know me, when I shall be sanctified in thee, O Gog, before their eyes:

38:16 И поднимешься на народ Мой, на Израиля, как туча, чтобы покрыть землю: это будет в последние дни, и Я приведу тебя на землю Мою, чтобы народы узнали Меня, когда Я над тобою, Гог, явлю святость Мою пред глазами их.
38:17
τάδε οδε further; this
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
κύριος κυριος lord; master
τῷ ο the
Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog
σὺ συ you
εἶ ειμι be
περὶ περι about; around
οὗ ος who; what
ἐλάλησα λαλεω talk; speak
πρὸ προ before; ahead of
ἡμερῶν ημερα day
τῶν ο the
ἔμπροσθεν εμπροσθεν in front; before
διὰ δια through; because of
χειρὸς χειρ hand
τῶν ο the
δούλων δουλος subject
μου μου of me; mine
προφητῶν προφητης prophet
τοῦ ο the
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
ἐν εν in
ταῖς ο the
ἡμέραις ημερα day
ἐκείναις εκεινος that
καὶ και and; even
ἔτεσιν ετος year
τοῦ ο the
ἀγαγεῖν αγω lead; pass
σε σε.1 you
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
αὐτούς αυτος he; him
38:17
כֹּֽה־ kˈō- כֹּה thus
אָמַ֞ר ʔāmˈar אמר say
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֗ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
הַֽ hˈa הֲ [interrogative]
אַתָּה־ ʔattā- אַתָּה you
ה֨וּא hˌû הוּא he
אֲשֶׁר־ ʔᵃšer- אֲשֶׁר [relative]
דִּבַּ֜רְתִּי dibbˈartî דבר speak
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
יָמִ֣ים yāmˈîm יֹום day
קַדְמֹונִ֗ים qaḏmônˈîm קַדְמֹנִי eastern
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
יַד֙ yˌaḏ יָד hand
עֲבָדַי֙ ʕᵃvāḏˌay עֶבֶד servant
נְבִיאֵ֣י nᵊvîʔˈê נָבִיא prophet
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
הַֽ hˈa הַ the
נִּבְּאִ֛ים nnibbᵊʔˈîm נבא speak as prophet
בַּ ba בְּ in
† הַ the
יָּמִ֥ים yyāmˌîm יֹום day
הָ hā הַ the
הֵ֖ם hˌēm הֵם they
שָׁנִ֑ים šānˈîm שָׁנָה year
לְ lᵊ לְ to
הָבִ֥יא hāvˌî בוא come
אֹתְךָ֖ ʔōṯᵊḵˌā אֵת [object marker]
עֲלֵיהֶֽם׃ ס ʕᵃlêhˈem . s עַל upon
38:17. haec dicit Dominus Deus tu ergo ille es de quo locutus sum in diebus antiquis in manu servorum meorum prophetarum Israhel qui prophetaverunt in diebus illorum temporum ut adducerem te super eos
Thus saith the Lord God: Thou then art he, of whom I have spoken in the days of old, by my servants the prophets of Israel, who prophesied in the days of those times that I would bring thee upon them.
17. Thus saith the Lord GOD: Art thou he of whom I spake in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days for years that I would bring thee against them?
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
17. “Не ты ли”. LХХ “ты еси”, может быть, потому, что считали не подходящим для Бога как бы размышление (рефлексии) над Его прежними предсказаниями. - “В древние дни чрез рабов Моих пророков”. Хотя Гог у прежних пророков не назван по имени, но все враждебное Богу, о чем говорили пророки, было в сущности то же, что Гог, и последний суд Божий над злом в мире, так называемые у пророков “день Господа”, день последний” - есть день уничтожение Гога. В частности Иезекииль мог иметь здесь в виду Чис XXIV:7: (“Агаг” = Гог по блаж. Иерониму), Ис X:5-34; XVII:12: и д.; Mих V:11; Соф III:8; Иер III-IV. Пророчество представляется здесь уже относительно законченной и объективной величиной, которая в истории раньше или позже должна осуществиться. Такое представление естественно накануне прекращения пророческого дара в Ветхом Завете; ср. Зах I:4. - “В те времена” - древние и долгие.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:17: Art thou he of whom I have spoken in old time - This prophecy concerning Antiochus and the Jews was delivered about four hundred years before the events took place. - Martin. Calmet maintains that Cambyses is spoken of, and refers to ancient prophecies, especially Isaiah 14, Isa 15:1-9, Isa 16:1-14, Isa 20:1-6, 21.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
38:17: Gog - is not mentioned by name in any existing prophecy before Ezekiel's time. The reference here shows
(1) that the conflict with Gog does not represent a particular event, but one of which the prophets in general had to speak;
(2) that in the interpretation of Old Testament prophecy we are to look beyond special fulfillments.
Events in the world's history come within a prophet's ken as parts of the divine administration whereby evil struggles against but is overcome by good. As every such conflict is a prelude to the final struggle, so its prediction has reference ultimately to the consummation here foretold.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:17: whom: Eze 38:10, Eze 38:11, Eze 38:16; Psa 110:5, Psa 110:6; Isa 27:1, Isa 34:1-6, Isa 63:1-6, Isa 66:15, Isa 66:16; Dan 11:40-45; Joe 3:9-14; Zac 12:2-8, Zac 14:1-21
by: Heb. the hands of
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
38:17
Announcement of the Wrathful Judgment upon Gog, as a Proof of the Holiness of the Lord
Ezek 38:17. Thus saith the Lord Jehovah, Art thou he of whom I spoke in the former days through my servants the prophets of Israel, who prophesied for years in those days, that I would bring thee over them? Ezek 38:18. And it cometh to pass in that day, in the day when Gog cometh into the land of Israel, is the saying of the Lord Jehovah, that my wrath will ascend into my nose. Ezek 38:19. And in my jealousy, in the fire of my anger, have I spoken, Truly in that day will a great trembling come over the land of Israel; Ezek 38:20. The fishes of the sea, and the birds of heaven, and the beasts of the field, and every creeping thing that creepeth upon the ground, and all the men that are upon the ground, will tremble before me; and the mountains will be destroyed, and the rocky heights fall, and every wall will fall to the ground. Ezek 38:21. I will call the sword against him to all my holy mountains, is the saying of the Lord Jehovah: the sword of the one will be against the other. Ezek 38:22. And I will strive with him by pestilence and by blood, and overflowing rain-torrents and hailstones; fire and brimstone will I rain upon him and all his hosts, and upon the many peoples that are with him; Ezek 38:23. And will prove myself great and holy, and will make myself known before the eyes of many nations, that they may know that I am Jehovah. - The announcement of the way in which the Lord will sanctify Himself upon Gog (Ezek 38:16) commences with the statement in Ezek 38:17, that Gog is he of whom God has already spoken by the earlier prophets. This assertion is clothed in the form of a question: האתּה, not הלא אתּה, which is the interrogative form used for an emphatic assurance; whereas האתּה does not set down the point in question as indisputably certain, but suggests the inquiry for the purpose of giving a definite answer. The affirmative reply to the question asked is contained in the last clause of the verse: "to bring thee upon them;" so that האתּה הוּא really means, thou art truly he. The statement, that Gog is he of whom God had already spoken by the earlier prophets, does not mean that those prophets had actually mentioned Gog, but simply that Gog was the enemy of whose rising up against the people of God the prophets of the former time had prophesied, as well as of his destruction by a wrathful judgment of the Lord. שׁנים (for years, or years long) is an accusative of measure, not asyndeton to baבּיּמים, as the lxx and many of the commentators down to Hvernick have taken it to be. The design of this remark is not to accredit the prophecy by referring to the utterances of earlier prophets, but to show that the attack of the peoples gathered together by Gog, upon the land and people of the Lord, is not an unexpected event, or one at variance with the promise of the restoration of Israel as a kingdom of peace. To what utterances of the older prophets these words refer is a question difficult to answer. Zechariah (Zech 12:2-3; Zech 14:2-3) is of course not to be thought of, as Zechariah himself did not prophesy till after the captivity, and therefore not till after Ezekiel. But we may recall Joel 4:2 and 11ff.; Is 25:5, Is 25:10., Ezek 26:21; Jer 30:23 and 25; and, in fact, all the earlier prophets who prophesied of Jehovah's day of judgment upon all the heathen.
(Note: Aug. Kueper (Jeremias librr. sacrr., interpr. atque vindex, p. 82) has correctly observed concerning this verse, that "it is evident enough that there is no reference here to prophecies concerning Gog and Magog, which have been lost; but those general prophecies, which are met with on every hand directed against the enemies of the church, are here referred to Gog." And before him, J. F. Starck had already said: "In my opinion, we are to understand all those passages in the prophets which treat of the enemies of the church and its persecutions...these afflictions were preludes and shadows of the bloody persecution of Gog.")
Ezek 38:18 and Ezek 38:19 do not contain words which Jehovah spoke through the ancient prophets, and which Ezekiel now transfers to Gog and the time of his appearing (Hitzig and Kliefoth). The perfect דּבּרתּי in Ezek 38:19 by no means warrants such an assumption; for this is purely prophetic, expressing the certainty of the divine determination as a thing clearly proved. Still less can 'נאם אד in Ezek 38:18 be taken as a preterite, as Kliefoth supposes; nor can Ezek 38:18 and Ezek 38:19 be regarded as a thing long predicted, and so be separated from Ezek 38:20-23 as a word of God which is now for the first time uttered. For the anthropopathetic expression, "my wrath ascends in my nose," compare Ps 18:9, "smoke ascends in His nose." The outburst of wrath shows itself in the vehement breath which the wrathful man inhales and exhales through his nose (see the comm. on the Psalm, l.c.). The bursting out of the wrath of God is literally explained in Ezek 38:19. In the jealousy of His wrath God has spoken, i.e., determined, to inflict a great trembling upon the land of Israel. בּקנאתי (cf. Ezek 5:13) is strengthened by בּאשׁ עברתי (cf. Ezekiel 21:36; Ezek 22:21). The trembling which will come upon the land of Israel, so that all creatures in the sea, in the air, and upon the ground, tremble before Jehovah (מפּני), who appears to judgment, will rise in nature into an actual earthquake, which overthrows mountains, hills, and walls. מדרגות are steep heights, which can only be ascended by steps (Song 2:14). This picture of the trembling of the whole world, with all the creatures, before the Lord who is coming to judgment, both here and in Joel 4:16, Zech 14:4-5, rests upon the fact which actually occurred in connection with the revelation of God upon Sinai, when the whole mountain was made to quake (Ex 19:16.). The inhabitants of the land of Israel tremble at the terrible phenomena attending the revelation of the wrath of God, although the wrathful judgment does not apply to them, but to their enemies, Gog and his hosts. The Lord calls the sword against Gog, that his hosts may wound and slay one another. This feature of the destruction of the enemy by wounds inflicted by itself, which we meet with again in Zech 14:13, has its typical exemplar in the defeat of the Midianites in the time of Gideon (Judg 7:22), and also in that of the enemy invading Judah in the reign of Jehoshaphat (2Chron 20:23). In לכל־הרי the ל is not distributive, but indicates the direction: "to all my mountains." The overthrow of the enemy is intensified by marvellous plagues inflicted by God - pestilence and blood (cf. Ezek 28:23), torrents of rain and hailstones (cf. Ezek 13:11), and the raining of fire and brimstone upon Gog, as formerly upon Sodom and Gomorrah (Gen 19:24). - Thus will Jehovah prove Himself to be the almighty God by judgment upon His enemies, and sanctify Himself before all the nations (Ezek 38:23, compare Ezek 38:16 and Ezek 36:23).
Geneva 1599
38:17 Thus saith the Lord GOD; [Art] thou he of whom I have spoken of old (m) by my servants the prophets of Israel, who prophesied in those days [many] years that I would bring thee against them?
(m) By this he declares that no affliction can come to the Church of which they have not been advertised before to teach them to endure all things with more patience when they know that God has so ordained.
John Gill
38:17 Thus saith the Lord God,.... Putting the question that follows:
art thou he of whom I have spoken of old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days many years that I will bring thee against them? certainly thou art he: but who were the prophets that prophesied of Gog before Ezekiel, since he is the first that makes mention of him? to this it may be replied, that though he is not mentioned by name, yet he might be prophesied of under other names, as by Isaiah under the name of Leviathan, Is 27:1 and by Micah under the name of the Assyrian, Mic 5:5. The Jews (r) say that Eldad and Medad prophesied of him, which Jarchi, Kimchi, and Abendana remark; who all observe, agreeably to the Talmudists in the place referred to, that these two are the prophets meant; and therefore it is directed to be read not "shanim", years, but "shenaim", two; namely, those two prophets prophesied one prophecy at one time, or together; but this is not to be depended upon: it should be observed, that this must be considered as spoken at the time of the accomplishment of this prophecy, and so may have respect to the Prophet Ezekiel himself, or to Joel, Joel 3:1, and to Zechariah, Zech 14:1, and even to the book of the Revelation, Rev_ 16:14.
(r) T. Bab. Sanhedrin, fol. 17. 1. & Gloss. in ib.
John Wesley
38:17 Spoken - All these enterprises I have spoken of, and will as well defeat as I did foretel them.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:17 thou he of whom I have spoken in old time--Gog, &c. are here identified with the enemies spoken of in other prophecies (Num 24:17-24; Is 27:1; compare Is 26:20-21; Jer 30:23-24; Joel 3:1; Mic 5:5-6; Is 14:12-14; Is 59:19). God is represented as addressing Gog at the time of his assault; therefore, the "old time" is the time long prior, when Ezekiel uttered these prophecies; so, he also, as well as Daniel (Dan. 11:1-45) and Zechariah (Zec. 14:1-21) are included among "the prophets of Israel" here.
many years--ago.
38:1738:17: Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր ցԳովգ. Դո՛ւ ես վասն որոյ խօսեցայ յաւուրցն առաջնոց ՚ի ձեռն ծառայիցն իմոց մարգարէիցն Իսրայէլի յաւուրսն յայնոսիկ՝ եւ յամսն, ածել զքեզ ՚ի վերայ նոցա[12913]։ [12913] Օրինակ մի աստէն վերստին կարգէ վերնագիր. ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ։ Ոմանք. Խօսեցայ յաւուր յառաջնոյ ՚ի ձեռն։ Ոսկան. Եւ յայսս ածել զքեզ։
17 Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած Գոգին. “Դու նա ես, ում մասին խօսել եմ հին օրերից, իմ ծառաներից՝ Իսրայէլի իմ մարգարէներից մէկի միջոցով, այն օրերին ու տարիներին, երբ քեզ նրանց դէմ էի բերելու:
17 Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. «Դուն անիկա՞ ես, որ քեզի համար ժամանակին՝ այն օրերը ու տարիները մարգարէութիւն ընող Իսրայէլի մարգարէներուն՝ իմ ծառաներուս՝ միջոցով ըսի թէ ‘Քեզ անոնց վրայ պիտի բերեմ’։
Այսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր ցԳովգ. Դո՞ւ ես վասն որոյ խօսեցայ յաւուրցն առաջնոց ի ձեռն ծառայիցն իմոց մարգարէիցն Իսրայելի[831] յաւուրսն յայնոսիկ եւ յամսն, ածել զքեզ ի վերայ նոցա:

38:17: Ա՛յսպէս ասէ Տէր Տէր ցԳովգ. Դո՛ւ ես վասն որոյ խօսեցայ յաւուրցն առաջնոց ՚ի ձեռն ծառայիցն իմոց մարգարէիցն Իսրայէլի յաւուրսն յայնոսիկ՝ եւ յամսն, ածել զքեզ ՚ի վերայ նոցա[12913]։
[12913] Օրինակ մի աստէն վերստին կարգէ վերնագիր. ՚Ի վերայ Գովգայ։ Ոմանք. Խօսեցայ յաւուր յառաջնոյ ՚ի ձեռն։ Ոսկան. Եւ յայսս ածել զքեզ։
17 Այսպէս է ասում Տէր Աստուած Գոգին. “Դու նա ես, ում մասին խօսել եմ հին օրերից, իմ ծառաներից՝ Իսրայէլի իմ մարգարէներից մէկի միջոցով, այն օրերին ու տարիներին, երբ քեզ նրանց դէմ էի բերելու:
17 Տէր Եհովան այսպէս կ’ըսէ. «Դուն անիկա՞ ես, որ քեզի համար ժամանակին՝ այն օրերը ու տարիները մարգարէութիւն ընող Իսրայէլի մարգարէներուն՝ իմ ծառաներուս՝ միջոցով ըսի թէ ‘Քեզ անոնց վրայ պիտի բերեմ’։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1738:17 Так говорит Господь Бог: не ты ли тот самый, о котором Я говорил в древние дни чрез рабов Моих, пророков Израилевых, которые пророчествовали в те времена, что Я приведу тебя на них?
38:18 καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that ἐν εν in ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ᾗ ος who; what ἂν αν perhaps; ever ἔλθῃ ερχομαι come; go Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog ἐπὶ επι in; on τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land τοῦ ο the Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master κύριος κυριος lord; master ἀναβήσεται αναβαινω step up; ascend ὁ ο the θυμός θυμος provocation; temper μου μου of me; mine
38:18 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֣ה׀ hāyˈā היה be בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he בְּ bᵊ בְּ in יֹ֨ום yˌôm יֹום day בֹּ֥וא bˌô בוא come גֹוג֙ ḡôḡ גֹּוג Gog עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אַדְמַ֣ת ʔaḏmˈaṯ אֲדָמָה soil יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH תַּעֲלֶ֥ה taʕᵃlˌeh עלה ascend חֲמָתִ֖י ḥᵃmāṯˌî חֵמָה heat בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אַפִּֽי׃ ʔappˈî אַף nose
38:18. et erit in die illa in die adventus Gog super terram Israhel ait Dominus Deus ascendet indignatio mea in furore meoAnd it shall come to pass in that day, in the day of the coming of Gog upon the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my indignation shall come up in my wrath.
18. And it shall come to pass in that day, when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord GOD, that my fury shall come up into my nostrils.
Thus saith the Lord GOD; [Art] thou he of whom I have spoken in old time by my servants the prophets of Israel, which prophesied in those days [many] years that I would bring thee against them:

38:17 Так говорит Господь Бог: не ты ли тот самый, о котором Я говорил в древние дни чрез рабов Моих, пророков Израилевых, которые пророчествовали в те времена, что Я приведу тебя на них?
38:18
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἐν εν in
τῇ ο the
ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day
ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that
ἐν εν in
ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day
ᾗ ος who; what
ἂν αν perhaps; ever
ἔλθῃ ερχομαι come; go
Γωγ γωγ Gōg; Gog
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὴν ο the
γῆν γη earth; land
τοῦ ο the
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
κύριος κυριος lord; master
ἀναβήσεται αναβαινω step up; ascend
ὁ ο the
θυμός θυμος provocation; temper
μου μου of me; mine
38:18
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֣ה׀ hāyˈā היה be
בַּ ba בְּ in
† הַ the
יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day
הַ ha הַ the
ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
יֹ֨ום yˌôm יֹום day
בֹּ֥וא bˌô בוא come
גֹוג֙ ḡôḡ גֹּוג Gog
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אַדְמַ֣ת ʔaḏmˈaṯ אֲדָמָה soil
יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
תַּעֲלֶ֥ה taʕᵃlˌeh עלה ascend
חֲמָתִ֖י ḥᵃmāṯˌî חֵמָה heat
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אַפִּֽי׃ ʔappˈî אַף nose
38:18. et erit in die illa in die adventus Gog super terram Israhel ait Dominus Deus ascendet indignatio mea in furore meo
And it shall come to pass in that day, in the day of the coming of Gog upon the land of Israel, saith the Lord God, that my indignation shall come up in my wrath.
18. And it shall come to pass in that day, when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord GOD, that my fury shall come up into my nostrils.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
18. “Ярость” - другое побуждение к уничтожению Гога; помимо благоволения к избранному народу - негодование на зло.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:18: that: Eze 36:5, Eze 36:6; Deu 32:22; Psa 18:7, Psa 18:8, Psa 89:46; Nah 1:2; Heb 12:29
John Gill
38:18 And it shall come to pass at the same time, when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord God,.... As before prophesied of and described:
that my fury shall come up in my face; as a man's blood rises up in his face, and his colour appears, when he is wroth and angry: or, "in my nose" (s); as men when they are angry puff and blow, expand their nose, breathe through it; but against whom is all this wrath and fury? Starckius, a modern interpreter, thinks it is against the land of Israel, against the church; but it rather seems to be against Gog himself; the Lord being provoked at his attempt against the land of Israel, and the wicked designs he had to spoil and plunder it.
(s) "in nasum meum", Piscator, Cocceius, Starckius.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:18 fury shall come up in my face--literally, "nose"; in Hebrew, the idiomatic expression for anger, as men in anger breathe strongly through the nostrils. Anthropopathy: God stooping to human modes of thought (Ps 18:8).
38:1838:18: Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում եկեսցէ Գովգ ՚ի վերայ երկրիդ Իսրայէլի՝ ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ելցէ սրտմտութիւն իմ բարկութեամբ,
18 Եւ այն օրը, երբ Գոգը գայ Իսրայէլի երկրի դէմ, - ասում է Տէր Աստուած, - սաստկանալու է զայրոյթս,
18 ‘Այն օրը, Գոգին Իսրայէլի երկրին վրայ եկած օրը, կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան, իմ սրտմտութիւնս երեսս պիտի ելլէ*։
Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում եկեսցէ Գովգ ի վերայ երկրիդ Իսրայելի, ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ելցէ սրտմտութիւն իմ բարկութեամբ:

38:18: Եւ եղիցի յաւուր յայնմիկ յորում եկեսցէ Գովգ ՚ի վերայ երկրիդ Իսրայէլի՝ ասէ Տէր Տէր. Ելցէ սրտմտութիւն իմ բարկութեամբ,
18 Եւ այն օրը, երբ Գոգը գայ Իսրայէլի երկրի դէմ, - ասում է Տէր Աստուած, - սաստկանալու է զայրոյթս,
18 ‘Այն օրը, Գոգին Իսրայէլի երկրին վրայ եկած օրը, կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան, իմ սրտմտութիւնս երեսս պիտի ելլէ*։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1838:18 И будет в тот день, когда Гог придет на землю Израилеву, говорит Господь Бог, гнев Мой воспылает в ярости Моей.
38:19 καὶ και and; even ὁ ο the ζῆλός ζηλος zeal; jealousy μου μου of me; mine ἐν εν in πυρὶ πυρ fire τῆς ο the ὀργῆς οργη passion; temperament μου μου of me; mine ἐλάλησα λαλεω talk; speak εἰ ει if; whether μὴν μην surely; certainly ἐν εν in τῇ ο the ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that ἔσται ειμι be σεισμὸς σεισμος earthquake μέγας μεγας great; loud ἐπὶ επι in; on γῆς γη earth; land Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
38:19 וּ û וְ and בְ vᵊ בְּ in קִנְאָתִ֥י qinʔāṯˌî קִנְאָה jealousy בְ vᵊ בְּ in אֵשׁ־ ʔēš- אֵשׁ fire עֶבְרָתִ֖י ʕevrāṯˌî עֶבְרָה anger דִּבַּ֑רְתִּי dibbˈartî דבר speak אִם־ ʔim- אִם if לֹ֣א׀ lˈō לֹא not בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day הַ ha הַ the ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he יִֽהְיֶה֙ yˈihyeh היה be רַ֣עַשׁ rˈaʕaš רַעַשׁ quaking גָּדֹ֔ול gāḏˈôl גָּדֹול great עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon אַדְמַ֥ת ʔaḏmˌaṯ אֲדָמָה soil יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
38:19. et in zelo meo in igne irae meae locutus sum quia in die illa erit commotio magna super terram IsrahelAnd I have spoken in my zeal, and in the fire of my anger, that in that day there shall be a great commotion upon the land of Israel:
19. For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel;
And it shall come to pass at the same time when Gog shall come against the land of Israel, saith the Lord GOD, [that] my fury shall come up in my face:

38:18 И будет в тот день, когда Гог придет на землю Израилеву, говорит Господь Бог, гнев Мой воспылает в ярости Моей.
38:19
καὶ και and; even
ὁ ο the
ζῆλός ζηλος zeal; jealousy
μου μου of me; mine
ἐν εν in
πυρὶ πυρ fire
τῆς ο the
ὀργῆς οργη passion; temperament
μου μου of me; mine
ἐλάλησα λαλεω talk; speak
εἰ ει if; whether
μὴν μην surely; certainly
ἐν εν in
τῇ ο the
ἡμέρᾳ ημερα day
ἐκείνῃ εκεινος that
ἔσται ειμι be
σεισμὸς σεισμος earthquake
μέγας μεγας great; loud
ἐπὶ επι in; on
γῆς γη earth; land
Ισραηλ ισραηλ.1 Israel
38:19
וּ û וְ and
בְ vᵊ בְּ in
קִנְאָתִ֥י qinʔāṯˌî קִנְאָה jealousy
בְ vᵊ בְּ in
אֵשׁ־ ʔēš- אֵשׁ fire
עֶבְרָתִ֖י ʕevrāṯˌî עֶבְרָה anger
דִּבַּ֑רְתִּי dibbˈartî דבר speak
אִם־ ʔim- אִם if
לֹ֣א׀ lˈō לֹא not
בַּ ba בְּ in
† הַ the
יֹּ֣ום yyˈôm יֹום day
הַ ha הַ the
ה֗וּא hˈû הוּא he
יִֽהְיֶה֙ yˈihyeh היה be
רַ֣עַשׁ rˈaʕaš רַעַשׁ quaking
גָּדֹ֔ול gāḏˈôl גָּדֹול great
עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon
אַדְמַ֥ת ʔaḏmˌaṯ אֲדָמָה soil
יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ yiśrāʔˈēl יִשְׂרָאֵל Israel
38:19. et in zelo meo in igne irae meae locutus sum quia in die illa erit commotio magna super terram Israhel
And I have spoken in my zeal, and in the fire of my anger, that in that day there shall be a great commotion upon the land of Israel:
19. For in my jealousy and in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel;
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
19. Ближайшим образом гнев Божий и слава Его обнаружится в сильном землетрясении (“потрясение” - слав. точнее: “трус”), которое Он произведет при вступлении врагов в его землю. Землетрясение с Амоса (VIII:8; IX:5) - один из признаков “дня Господня”, последнего суда Божия: Иоил III:16; Агг II:6-7; Мф XXIV:7, 29: и парал.; Откр XVI:8. - “Истинно” LXX, точнее “аще не”, - клятвенная формула.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:19: in my: Eze 39:25; Deu 29:20; Isa 42:13; Joe 2:18; Zac 1:14
Surely: Joe 3:16; Hag 2:6, Hag 2:7, Hag 2:21, Hag 2:22; Heb 12:26; Rev 11:13, Rev 16:18, Rev 16:20
John Gill
38:19 For in my jealousy, and in the fire of my wrath, have I spoken,.... Not against his people Israel, but against Gog, who had thought evil against them, and now was about to put it in practice; and therefore in zeal for his own glory, and for the good of his people, and in indignation against his and their enemies, he declares, resolves, and determines:
surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel; not a consternation among the people of Israel frightened at the armies of Gog, and the terrible appearance they shall make, and the devastations they threaten; but in Gog himself, and his army, through the wrath of God upon them, and the vengeance he will take of them in the land of Israel, they will enter upon to destroy; not but that there may be some dread in the minds of the Jews upon the appearance of so formidable an army in their land: this shaking, according to Jarchi, will be by thunder and lightning. Kimchi understands it of an earthquake, in a literal sense, and compares with it Zech 14:4, see also Rev_ 16:18, which speaks of an earthquake that will be about this time.
John Wesley
38:19 For - For my own people, and for mine own glory. Have I spoken - Against mine enemies Gog, and all his herd. A great shaking - A great disturbance and tumult, like an earthquake.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:19 great shaking--an earthquake: physical agitations after accompanying social and moral revolutions. Foretold also in Joel 3:16; (compare Hag 2:6-7; Mt 24:7, Mt 24:29; Rev_ 16:18).
38:1938:19: եւ նախա՛նձ իմ հրով բարկութեան իմոյ. խօսեցայ թէ ո՛չ յաւուր յայնմիկ եղիցի շարժումն մեծ ՚ի վերայ երկրին Իսրայէլի.
19 նաեւ նախանձս՝ իմ բարկութեան հրով: Ասել եմ, որ այն օրն Իսրայէլի երկրի վրայ մեծ երկրաշարժ է լինելու.
19 Իմ նախանձովս, իմ բարկութեանս կրակովը խօսեցայ, որ այն ատեն անշուշտ Իսրայէլի երկրին վրայ մեծ խռովութիւն պիտի ըլլայ.
եւ ի նախանձ իմ` հրով բարկութեան իմոյ խօսեցայ, թէ ոչ` յաւուր յայնմիկ եղիցի շարժումն մեծ ի վերայ երկրին Իսրայելի:

38:19: եւ նախա՛նձ իմ հրով բարկութեան իմոյ. խօսեցայ թէ ո՛չ յաւուր յայնմիկ եղիցի շարժումն մեծ ՚ի վերայ երկրին Իսրայէլի.
19 նաեւ նախանձս՝ իմ բարկութեան հրով: Ասել եմ, որ այն օրն Իսրայէլի երկրի վրայ մեծ երկրաշարժ է լինելու.
19 Իմ նախանձովս, իմ բարկութեանս կրակովը խօսեցայ, որ այն ատեն անշուշտ Իսրայէլի երկրին վրայ մեծ խռովութիւն պիտի ըլլայ.
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:1938:19 И в ревности Моей, в огне негодования Моего Я сказал: истинно в тот день произойдет великое потрясение на земле Израилевой.
38:20 καὶ και and; even σεισθήσονται σειω shake ἀπὸ απο from; away προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of κυρίου κυριος lord; master οἱ ο the ἰχθύες ιχθυς fish τῆς ο the θαλάσσης θαλασσα sea καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the πετεινὰ πετεινος bird τοῦ ο the οὐρανοῦ ουρανος sky; heaven καὶ και and; even τὰ ο the θηρία θηριον beast τοῦ ο the πεδίου πεδιον and; even πάντα πας all; every τὰ ο the ἑρπετὰ ερπετον reptile τὰ ο the ἕρποντα ερπω in; on τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land καὶ και and; even πάντες πας all; every οἱ ο the ἄνθρωποι ανθρωπος person; human οἱ ο the ἐπὶ επι in; on προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of τῆς ο the γῆς γη earth; land καὶ και and; even ῥαγήσεται ρηγνυμι gore; burst τὰ ο the ὄρη ορος mountain; mount καὶ και and; even πεσοῦνται πιπτω fall αἱ ο the φάραγγες φαραγξ gorge καὶ και and; even πᾶν πας all; every τεῖχος τειχος wall ἐπὶ επι in; on τὴν ο the γῆν γη earth; land πεσεῖται πιπτω fall
38:20 וְ wᵊ וְ and רָעֲשׁ֣וּ rāʕᵃšˈû רעשׁ quake מִ mi מִן from פָּנַ֡י ppānˈay פָּנֶה face דְּגֵ֣י dᵊḡˈê דָּג fish הַ ha הַ the יָּם֩ yyˌom יָם sea וְ wᵊ וְ and עֹ֨וף ʕˌôf עֹוף birds הַ ha הַ the שָּׁמַ֜יִם ššāmˈayim שָׁמַיִם heavens וְ wᵊ וְ and חַיַּ֣ת ḥayyˈaṯ חַיָּה wild animal הַ ha הַ the שָּׂדֶ֗ה śśāḏˈeh שָׂדֶה open field וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole הָ hā הַ the רֶ֨מֶשׂ֙ rˈemeś רֶמֶשׂ creeping animals הָ hā הַ the רֹמֵ֣שׂ rōmˈēś רמשׂ creep עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon הָֽ hˈā הַ the אֲדָמָ֔ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil וְ wᵊ וְ and כֹל֙ ḵˌōl כֹּל whole הָֽ hˈā הַ the אָדָ֔ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon פְּנֵ֣י pᵊnˈê פָּנֶה face הָ hā הַ the אֲדָמָ֑ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil וְ wᵊ וְ and נֶהֶרְס֣וּ nehersˈû הרס tear down הֶ he הַ the הָרִ֗ים hārˈîm הַר mountain וְ wᵊ וְ and נָֽפְלוּ֙ nˈāfᵊlû נפל fall הַ ha הַ the מַּדְרֵגֹ֔ות mmaḏrēḡˈôṯ מַדְרֵגָה steep way וְ wᵊ וְ and כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole חֹומָ֖ה ḥômˌā חֹומָה wall לָ lā לְ to † הַ the אָ֥רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth תִּפֹּֽול׃ tippˈôl נפל fall
38:20. et commovebuntur a facie mea pisces maris et volucres caeli et bestiae agri et omne reptile quod movetur super humum cunctique homines qui sunt super faciem terrae et subvertentur montes et cadent sepes et omnis murus in terra corruetSo that the fishes of the sea, and the birds of the air, and the beasts of the field, and every creeping thing that creepeth upon the ground, and all men that are upon the face of the earth, shall be moved at my presence: and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the hedges shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground.
20. so that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground.
For in my jealousy [and] in the fire of my wrath have I spoken, Surely in that day there shall be a great shaking in the land of Israel:

38:19 И в ревности Моей, в огне негодования Моего Я сказал: истинно в тот день произойдет великое потрясение на земле Израилевой.
38:20
καὶ και and; even
σεισθήσονται σειω shake
ἀπὸ απο from; away
προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of
κυρίου κυριος lord; master
οἱ ο the
ἰχθύες ιχθυς fish
τῆς ο the
θαλάσσης θαλασσα sea
καὶ και and; even
τὰ ο the
πετεινὰ πετεινος bird
τοῦ ο the
οὐρανοῦ ουρανος sky; heaven
καὶ και and; even
τὰ ο the
θηρία θηριον beast
τοῦ ο the
πεδίου πεδιον and; even
πάντα πας all; every
τὰ ο the
ἑρπετὰ ερπετον reptile
τὰ ο the
ἕρποντα ερπω in; on
τῆς ο the
γῆς γη earth; land
καὶ και and; even
πάντες πας all; every
οἱ ο the
ἄνθρωποι ανθρωπος person; human
οἱ ο the
ἐπὶ επι in; on
προσώπου προσωπον face; ahead of
τῆς ο the
γῆς γη earth; land
καὶ και and; even
ῥαγήσεται ρηγνυμι gore; burst
τὰ ο the
ὄρη ορος mountain; mount
καὶ και and; even
πεσοῦνται πιπτω fall
αἱ ο the
φάραγγες φαραγξ gorge
καὶ και and; even
πᾶν πας all; every
τεῖχος τειχος wall
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὴν ο the
γῆν γη earth; land
πεσεῖται πιπτω fall
38:20
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רָעֲשׁ֣וּ rāʕᵃšˈû רעשׁ quake
מִ mi מִן from
פָּנַ֡י ppānˈay פָּנֶה face
דְּגֵ֣י dᵊḡˈê דָּג fish
הַ ha הַ the
יָּם֩ yyˌom יָם sea
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֹ֨וף ʕˌôf עֹוף birds
הַ ha הַ the
שָּׁמַ֜יִם ššāmˈayim שָׁמַיִם heavens
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חַיַּ֣ת ḥayyˈaṯ חַיָּה wild animal
הַ ha הַ the
שָּׂדֶ֗ה śśāḏˈeh שָׂדֶה open field
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
הָ hā הַ the
רֶ֨מֶשׂ֙ rˈemeś רֶמֶשׂ creeping animals
הָ hā הַ the
רֹמֵ֣שׂ rōmˈēś רמשׂ creep
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אֲדָמָ֔ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כֹל֙ ḵˌōl כֹּל whole
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אָדָ֔ם ʔāḏˈām אָדָם human, mankind
אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
פְּנֵ֣י pᵊnˈê פָּנֶה face
הָ hā הַ the
אֲדָמָ֑ה ʔᵃḏāmˈā אֲדָמָה soil
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נֶהֶרְס֣וּ nehersˈû הרס tear down
הֶ he הַ the
הָרִ֗ים hārˈîm הַר mountain
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נָֽפְלוּ֙ nˈāfᵊlû נפל fall
הַ ha הַ the
מַּדְרֵגֹ֔ות mmaḏrēḡˈôṯ מַדְרֵגָה steep way
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
חֹומָ֖ה ḥômˌā חֹומָה wall
לָ lā לְ to
† הַ the
אָ֥רֶץ ʔˌāreṣ אֶרֶץ earth
תִּפֹּֽול׃ tippˈôl נפל fall
38:20. et commovebuntur a facie mea pisces maris et volucres caeli et bestiae agri et omne reptile quod movetur super humum cunctique homines qui sunt super faciem terrae et subvertentur montes et cadent sepes et omnis murus in terra corruet
So that the fishes of the sea, and the birds of the air, and the beasts of the field, and every creeping thing that creepeth upon the ground, and all men that are upon the face of the earth, shall be moved at my presence: and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the hedges shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground.
20. so that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
20. Вместе с землею придет в колебание вся природа: четырехсоставное царство животных, все человечество и бездушная природа.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:20: the fishes: Jer 4:23-26; Hos 4:3; Nah 1:4-6; Zac 14:4, Zac 14:5; Rev 6:12, Rev 6:13
steep places: or, towers, or stairs, Isa 30:25; Co2 10:4
Geneva 1599
38:20 So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping animals that creep upon the earth, and all the men that [are] upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be overturned, and the (n) steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground.
(n) All means by which man would think to save himself will fail, the affliction in those days will be so great, and the enemies destruction will be so terrible.
John Gill
38:20 So that the fishes of the sea shall shake at my presence,.... From whence it appears that this great shaking shall not be on account of the army of Gog, and the devastations that it shall make; but on account of the powerful presence of God, which will be manifest in the destruction of his army: and what is here said of the shaking of the fishes of the sea,
and the fowls of the heaven, and the beast of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that are upon the earth, must be understood figuratively and hyperbolically, as Kimchi observes, and in allusion to earthquakes, which both shake and terrify all kind of creatures; the blow given to Gog will be so terrible, that all nature will seem to be thrown into a convulsion and agitation by it; see Jer 4:24,
and the mountains shall be thrown down; as they are sometimes by earthquakes; and as the mount of Olives will at this time cleave asunder; and perhaps other mountains will, as Kimchi observes, see Zech 14:2,
and the steep places shall fall; the Targum renders the word "towers"; and so the Syriac version, and Piscator: the word signifies stairs or steps (t), such as in a ladder; and is translated "stairs", Song 2:14 it seems to me to design such mounts as are raised by besiegers of a city, by means of which they may be able to scale the walls of it, which Jarchi suggests; though he says he had heard it said that these, are rocks bending over and hanging, and appear as if they were falling; which agrees with our version; and it may be observed, in some of those precipices, there are like stairs or steps to go up them:
and every wall shall fall to the ground: this shows that the words are not to be taken literally, but figuratively; only to express how sensibly the power of God should be felt and perceived by all creatures, and in all parts of the land; since now the Jews will dwell in a land of unwalled villages, and in cities without walls, bars, and gates; see Ezek 38:11.
(t) "gradus", Munster, Pagninus, Montanus.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:20 fishes--disturbed by the fleets which I will bring.
fowls, &c.--frightened at the sight of so many men: an ideal picture.
mountains--that is, the fortresses on the mountains.
steep places--literally, "stairs" (Song 2:14); steep terraces for vines on the sides of hills, to prevent the earth being washed down by the rains.
every wall--of towns.
38:2038:20: եւ խռովեսցին յերեսաց իմոց ձկունք ծովու, եւ թռչունք երկնից, եւ գազանք դաշտաց, եւ ամենայն սողունք երկրի, եւ ամենայն մարդիկ որ ՚ի վերայ երեսաց երկրի. լերինք պատառեսցին, եւ ձորք տապալեսցին, եւ ամենայն պարիսպք երկրին կործանեսցին։
20 ծովի ձկները, երկնքի թռչունները, դաշտերի գազանները, երկրի բոլոր սողունները, նաեւ երկրի երեսին գտնուող բոլոր մարդիկ դողալու են իմ դիմաց: Ճեղքուելու են լեռները, տապալուելու են ձորերը, կործանուելու են երկրի բոլոր պարիսպները:
20 Ծովուն ձուկերն ու երկնքի թռչունները եւ դաշտի գազաններն ու գետնի վրայ սողացող բոլոր սողունները ու երկրի երեսին վրայ եղող բոլոր մարդիկը իմ երեսէս պիտի խռովին եւ լեռները պիտի փլչին ու ժայռերը գահավէժ պիտի իյնան ու բոլոր պարիսպները գետինը պիտի իյնան։
Եւ խռովեսցին յերեսաց իմոց ձկունք ծովու եւ թռչունք երկնից եւ գազանք դաշտաց, եւ ամենայն սողունք երկրի, եւ ամենայն մարդիկ որ ի վերայ երեսաց երկրի. լերինք պատառեսցին, եւ [832]ձորք տապալեսցին, եւ ամենայն պարիսպք երկրին կործանեսցին:

38:20: եւ խռովեսցին յերեսաց իմոց ձկունք ծովու, եւ թռչունք երկնից, եւ գազանք դաշտաց, եւ ամենայն սողունք երկրի, եւ ամենայն մարդիկ որ ՚ի վերայ երեսաց երկրի. լերինք պատառեսցին, եւ ձորք տապալեսցին, եւ ամենայն պարիսպք երկրին կործանեսցին։
20 ծովի ձկները, երկնքի թռչունները, դաշտերի գազանները, երկրի բոլոր սողունները, նաեւ երկրի երեսին գտնուող բոլոր մարդիկ դողալու են իմ դիմաց: Ճեղքուելու են լեռները, տապալուելու են ձորերը, կործանուելու են երկրի բոլոր պարիսպները:
20 Ծովուն ձուկերն ու երկնքի թռչունները եւ դաշտի գազաններն ու գետնի վրայ սողացող բոլոր սողունները ու երկրի երեսին վրայ եղող բոլոր մարդիկը իմ երեսէս պիտի խռովին եւ լեռները պիտի փլչին ու ժայռերը գահավէժ պիտի իյնան ու բոլոր պարիսպները գետինը պիտի իյնան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:2038:20 И вострепещут от лица Моего рыбы морские и птицы небесные, и звери полевые и все пресмыкающееся, ползающее по земле, и все люди, которые на лице земли, и обрушатся горы, и упадут утесы, и все стены падут на землю.
38:21 καὶ και and; even καλέσω καλεω call; invite ἐπ᾿ επι in; on αὐτὸν αυτος he; him πᾶν πας all; every φόβον φοβος fear; awe λέγει λεγω tell; declare κύριος κυριος lord; master μάχαιρα μαχαιρα short sword ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human ἐπὶ επι in; on τὸν ο the ἀδελφὸν αδελφος brother αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him ἔσται ειμι be
38:21 וְ wᵊ וְ and קָרָ֨אתִי qārˌāṯî קרא call עָלָ֤יו ʕālˈāʸw עַל upon לְ lᵊ לְ to כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole הָרַי֙ hārˌay הַר mountain חֶ֔רֶב ḥˈerev חֶרֶב dagger נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH חֶ֥רֶב ḥˌerev חֶרֶב dagger אִ֖ישׁ ʔˌîš אִישׁ man בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אָחִ֥יו ʔāḥˌiʸw אָח brother תִּֽהְיֶֽה׃ tˈihyˈeh היה be
38:21. et convocabo adversum eum in cunctis montibus meis gladium ait Dominus Deus gladius uniuscuiusque in fratrem suum dirigeturAnd I will call in the sword against him in all my mountains, saith the Lord God: every man's sword shall be pointed against his brother.
21. And I will call for a sword against him unto all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man’s sword shall be against his brother.
So that the fishes of the sea, and the fowls of the heaven, and the beasts of the field, and all creeping things that creep upon the earth, and all the men that [are] upon the face of the earth, shall shake at my presence, and the mountains shall be thrown down, and the steep places shall fall, and every wall shall fall to the ground:

38:20 И вострепещут от лица Моего рыбы морские и птицы небесные, и звери полевые и все пресмыкающееся, ползающее по земле, и все люди, которые на лице земли, и обрушатся горы, и упадут утесы, и все стены падут на землю.
38:21
καὶ και and; even
καλέσω καλεω call; invite
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
αὐτὸν αυτος he; him
πᾶν πας all; every
φόβον φοβος fear; awe
λέγει λεγω tell; declare
κύριος κυριος lord; master
μάχαιρα μαχαιρα short sword
ἀνθρώπου ανθρωπος person; human
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὸν ο the
ἀδελφὸν αδελφος brother
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
ἔσται ειμι be
38:21
וְ wᵊ וְ and
קָרָ֨אתִי qārˌāṯî קרא call
עָלָ֤יו ʕālˈāʸw עַל upon
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
הָרַי֙ hārˌay הַר mountain
חֶ֔רֶב ḥˈerev חֶרֶב dagger
נְאֻ֖ם nᵊʔˌum נְאֻם speech
אֲדֹנָ֣י ʔᵃḏōnˈāy אֲדֹנָי Lord
יְהוִ֑ה [yᵊhwˈih] יְהוָה YHWH
חֶ֥רֶב ḥˌerev חֶרֶב dagger
אִ֖ישׁ ʔˌîš אִישׁ man
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אָחִ֥יו ʔāḥˌiʸw אָח brother
תִּֽהְיֶֽה׃ tˈihyˈeh היה be
38:21. et convocabo adversum eum in cunctis montibus meis gladium ait Dominus Deus gladius uniuscuiusque in fratrem suum dirigetur
And I will call in the sword against him in all my mountains, saith the Lord God: every man's sword shall be pointed against his brother.
21. And I will call for a sword against him unto all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man’s sword shall be against his brother.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
21. Затем войско Гога будет уничтожено тем, что союзники восстанут друг на друга и обратят меч на себя. Может быть, это представляется следствием того смятения, в какое придут они от страшного землетрясения. Ср. Суд VII:22; 3: Цар XIV:20; 2: Пар XX:23; Зах XIV:13. - “По всем горам Моим” - в гористой земле Израилевой. Но выражение не так естественно, как в ст. 8: и под. Посему LXX лучше: “весь страх” (гарада вместо гарай), к чему только слав. прибавляет: “мечный”; без этого - глаже, потому что о мече далее речь.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:21: I will call for a sword against him - Meaning Judas Maccabeus, who defeated his army under Lysias, making a horrible carnage. - Martin. Cambyses had no wars in the mountains of Israel.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:21: I will: Eze 14:17; Psa 105:16
every: Jdg 7:22; Sa1 14:20; Ch2 20:23; Hag 2:22
Geneva 1599
38:21 And I will call for a sword against him (o) throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man's sword shall be against his brother.
(o) Against the people of God and Magog.
John Gill
38:21 And I will call for a sword against him,.... That is, against Gog; or, as I would choose to render the words, "for I will call for a sword", so the particle is rendered, Ezek 38:19 and which Noldius (u) agrees to; and this gives a reason why there should be such a commotion in the land of Israel; because the Lord, who has the swords of princes at his command, will call for the Christian kings to come to the assistance of the Jews, and fight against the Turk: who will pursue him
throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord God; throughout the land of Israel, which is mountainous; and is called the Lord's, because he hath chosen it for his people, given it to them, and now dwelt among them; and in all parts of it where the enemy is, the sword of the Jews, and of those princes that should come in to their assistance at the call of God, shall be sent against them, and cut them off: and not only so,
but every man's sword shall be against his brother; as the swords of the Midianites were, Judg 7:22, and of the enemies of Jehoshaphat, 2Chron 20:22. The Turkish army will consist of a mixed people of many nations, who will quarrel among themselves, and destroy one another.
(u) Concordant. Ebr. Partic. p. 285, 286.
John Wesley
38:21 Sword - Israel. Throughout - From all parts of the land, which was full of mountains. Every man's sword - As it was in Jehoshaphat's time; and these swords may be meant by the sword God will call for through all, for they ranged all over his mountains.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:21 every man's sword . . . against his brother--I will destroy them partly by My people's sword, partly by their swords being turned against one another (compare 2Chron 20:23).
38:2138:21: Եւ կոչեցից զա՛հ սրոյ ՚ի վերայ նորա՝ ասէ Տէր Տէր. սո՛ւր առն ՚ի վերայ եղբօր իւրոյ լինիցի[12914]. [12914] Ոմանք. Եւ կոչեցից զմահ սրոյ ՚ի վերայ։
21 Սրի ահն եմ նրա վրայ բերելու, - ասում է Տէր Աստուած. - ամէն մարդու սուրն իր եղբօր դէմ է լինելու:
21 Անոր դէմ՝ իմ բոլոր լեռներուս վրայ սուրը պիտի կանչեմ, կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան։ Մարդուն սուրը իր եղբօրը վրայ պիտի ըլլայ։
Եւ կոչեցից [833]զահ սրոյ ի վերայ նորա``, ասէ Տէր Տէր. սուր առն ի վերայ եղբօր իւրոյ լինիցի:

38:21: Եւ կոչեցից զա՛հ սրոյ ՚ի վերայ նորա՝ ասէ Տէր Տէր. սո՛ւր առն ՚ի վերայ եղբօր իւրոյ լինիցի[12914].
[12914] Ոմանք. Եւ կոչեցից զմահ սրոյ ՚ի վերայ։
21 Սրի ահն եմ նրա վրայ բերելու, - ասում է Տէր Աստուած. - ամէն մարդու սուրն իր եղբօր դէմ է լինելու:
21 Անոր դէմ՝ իմ բոլոր լեռներուս վրայ սուրը պիտի կանչեմ, կ’ըսէ Տէր Եհովան։ Մարդուն սուրը իր եղբօրը վրայ պիտի ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:2138:21 И по всем горам Моим призову меч против него, говорит Господь Бог; меч каждого человека будет против брата его.
38:22 καὶ και and; even κρινῶ κρινω judge; decide αὐτὸν αυτος he; him θανάτῳ θανατος death καὶ και and; even αἵματι αιμα blood; bloodstreams καὶ και and; even ὑετῷ υετος rain κατακλύζοντι κατακλυζω deluge καὶ και and; even λίθοις λιθος stone χαλάζης χαλαζα.1 hail καὶ και and; even πῦρ πυρ fire καὶ και and; even θεῖον θειος divine βρέξω βρεχω shower; rain ἐπ᾿ επι in; on αὐτὸν αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐπὶ επι in; on πάντας πας all; every τοὺς ο the μετ᾿ μετα with; amid αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐπ᾿ επι in; on ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste πολλὰ πολυς much; many μετ᾿ μετα with; amid αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
38:22 וְ wᵊ וְ and נִשְׁפַּטְתִּ֥י nišpaṭtˌî שׁפט judge אִתֹּ֖ו ʔittˌô אֵת together with בְּ bᵊ בְּ in דֶ֣בֶר ḏˈever דֶּבֶר pest וּ û וְ and בְ vᵊ בְּ in דָ֑ם ḏˈām דָּם blood וְ wᵊ וְ and גֶ֣שֶׁם ḡˈešem גֶּשֶׁם rain שֹׁוטֵף֩ šôṭˌēf שׁטף wash off וְ wᵊ וְ and אַבְנֵ֨י ʔavnˌê אֶבֶן stone אֶלְגָּבִ֜ישׁ ʔelgāvˈîš אֶלְגָּבִישׁ ice-crystal אֵ֣שׁ ʔˈēš אֵשׁ fire וְ wᵊ וְ and גָפְרִ֗ית ḡofrˈîṯ גָּפְרִית sulphur אַמְטִ֤יר ʔamṭˈîr מטר rain עָלָיו֙ ʕālāʸw עַל upon וְ wᵊ וְ and עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אֲגַפָּ֔יו ʔᵃḡappˈāʸw אֲגַף troop וְ wᵊ וְ and עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] אִתֹּֽו׃ ʔittˈô אֵת together with
38:22. et iudicabo eum peste et sanguine et imbre vehementi et lapidibus inmensis ignem et sulphur pluam super eum et super exercitum eius et super populos multos qui sunt cum eoAnd I will judge him with pestilence, and with blood, and with violent rain, and vast hailstones: I will rain fire and brimstone upon him, and upon his army, and upon the many nations that are with him.
22. And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood: and I will rain upon him, and upon his hordes, and upon the many peoples that are with him, an overflowing shower, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone.
And I will call for a sword against him throughout all my mountains, saith the Lord GOD: every man' s sword shall be against his brother:

38:21 И по всем горам Моим призову меч против него, говорит Господь Бог; меч каждого человека будет против брата его.
38:22
καὶ και and; even
κρινῶ κρινω judge; decide
αὐτὸν αυτος he; him
θανάτῳ θανατος death
καὶ και and; even
αἵματι αιμα blood; bloodstreams
καὶ και and; even
ὑετῷ υετος rain
κατακλύζοντι κατακλυζω deluge
καὶ και and; even
λίθοις λιθος stone
χαλάζης χαλαζα.1 hail
καὶ και and; even
πῦρ πυρ fire
καὶ και and; even
θεῖον θειος divine
βρέξω βρεχω shower; rain
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
αὐτὸν αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
ἐπὶ επι in; on
πάντας πας all; every
τοὺς ο the
μετ᾿ μετα with; amid
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
ἐπ᾿ επι in; on
ἔθνη εθνος nation; caste
πολλὰ πολυς much; many
μετ᾿ μετα with; amid
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
38:22
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נִשְׁפַּטְתִּ֥י nišpaṭtˌî שׁפט judge
אִתֹּ֖ו ʔittˌô אֵת together with
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
דֶ֣בֶר ḏˈever דֶּבֶר pest
וּ û וְ and
בְ vᵊ בְּ in
דָ֑ם ḏˈām דָּם blood
וְ wᵊ וְ and
גֶ֣שֶׁם ḡˈešem גֶּשֶׁם rain
שֹׁוטֵף֩ šôṭˌēf שׁטף wash off
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַבְנֵ֨י ʔavnˌê אֶבֶן stone
אֶלְגָּבִ֜ישׁ ʔelgāvˈîš אֶלְגָּבִישׁ ice-crystal
אֵ֣שׁ ʔˈēš אֵשׁ fire
וְ wᵊ וְ and
גָפְרִ֗ית ḡofrˈîṯ גָּפְרִית sulphur
אַמְטִ֤יר ʔamṭˈîr מטר rain
עָלָיו֙ ʕālāʸw עַל upon
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אֲגַפָּ֔יו ʔᵃḡappˈāʸw אֲגַף troop
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
עַמִּ֥ים ʕammˌîm עַם people
רַבִּ֖ים rabbˌîm רַב much
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
אִתֹּֽו׃ ʔittˈô אֵת together with
38:22. et iudicabo eum peste et sanguine et imbre vehementi et lapidibus inmensis ignem et sulphur pluam super eum et super exercitum eius et super populos multos qui sunt cum eo
And I will judge him with pestilence, and with blood, and with violent rain, and vast hailstones: I will rain fire and brimstone upon him, and upon his army, and upon the many nations that are with him.
22. And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood: and I will rain upon him, and upon his hordes, and upon the many peoples that are with him, an overflowing shower, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
22. “Весь арсенал Божественных кар будет употреблен против Гога” (Кречм.). - “Язвою и кровопролитием” см. объяснение V:17. - “Всепотопляющий дождь” - почти второй потоп. “Каменный град”, как в Египте и при И. Навине (X:11), букв. “камни огромные” (= Вульг.) см. объяснение XIII:11. - “Огонь и серу”, как на Содом. Быт XIX:24; Пс X:6; 4: Цар I:10. Те кары Божии, которые посылались в отдельности на все развивающееся нечестие, теперь соединятся все против Гога, потому что он будет завершением земного нечестия. Соединение самых сильных бедствий будет столь же ужасно, как ужасно будет это последнее на земле возмущена против Бога.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
38:22: Great hailstones, fire, and brimstone - These are probably figurative expressions, to signify that the whole tide of the war should be against him, and that his defeat and slaughter should be great. Abp. Newcome supposes all the above prophecy remains yet to be fulfilled. Where such eminent scribes are divided, who shall decide!
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:22: I will plead: Isa 66:16; Jer 25:31; Zac 14:12-15
with pestilence: Eze 5:17
an overflowing: Eze 13:11; Gen 19:24; Exo 9:22-25; Jos 10:11; Psa 11:6, Psa 18:12-14, Psa 77:16-18; Isa 28:17, Isa 29:6, Isa 30:30-33; Mat 7:27; Rev 16:21
John Gill
38:22 And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood,.... Not only the sword of the Jews and the sword of Christian princes shall be drawn against him, and the sword of Gog's soldiers against one another; but the Lord himself would plead with him by his judgments, or take vengeance on him, as the Targum; and send a pestilence in his army, which should destroy vast numbers of it; as the army of Sennacherib was destroyed by one when before Jerusalem; and make a great slaughter among them by that and other judgments:
and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that are with him, an overflowing rain; a horrible tempest of divine wrath, Ps 11:6 as he came into the land of Israel like a storm, so he shall be destroyed by one much more terrible:
and great hailstones; such as were cast upon the Canaanites, Josh 10:11 and as there will be on men, the enemies of the church of God, at the pouring out of the seventh vial, Rev_ 16:21,
fire and brimstone; as God rained upon Sodom and Gomorrah, Gen 19:24, signifying that in like manner will God deal with those enemies of his people; so at the battle of Armageddon, which seems to be the same with this here, the beast and the false prophet will be taken alive, and cast into a lake of fire burning with brimstone, Rev_ 19:20, and to this rain or tempest of fire and brimstone upon Gog there is an allusion in Rev_ 20:9.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
38:22 plead--a forensic term; because God in His inflictions acts on the principles of His own immutable justice, not by arbitrary impulse (Is 66:16; Jer 25:31).
blood . . . hailstones, fire-- (Rev_ 8:7; Rev_ 16:21). The imagery is taken from the destruction of Sodom and the plagues of Egypt (compare Ps 11:6). Antiochus died by "pestilence" (2 Maccabees 9:5).
38:2238:22: եւ դատեցայց զնա արեամբ եւ մահու. եւ հեղեղօք անձրեւաց, եւ վիմօք կարկտի. եւ հուր եւ ծծումբ տեղացից ՚ի վերայ նորա, եւ ՚ի վերայ ամենեցուն որ ընդ նմա իցեն, եւ ՚ի վերայ ազգաց բազմաց որ ընդ նմա։
22 Նրա դատաստանն արիւնով ու համաճարակով եմ տեսնելու, անձրեւների հեղեղներով ու քարէ կարկուտներով. հուր ու ծծումբ եմ տեղալու նրա ու բոլոր նրանց վրայ, որ նրա հետ կը լինեն, բազմաթիւ ժողովուրդների վրայ, որ կը լինեն նրա հետ:
22 Զայն ժանտախտով ու արիւնով պիտի դատեմ եւ անոր վրայ ու անոր զօրքերուն գունդերուն վրայ ու անոր հետ եղող ժողովուրդներուն վրայ յորդահոս անձրեւ ու կարկուտի քարեր, կրակ ու ծծումբ պիտի տեղան։
Եւ դատեցայց զնա արեամբ եւ մահու, եւ հեղեղօք անձրեւաց եւ վիմօք կարկտի եւ հուր եւ ծծումբ տեղացից ի վերայ նորա, եւ ի վերայ [834]ամենեցուն որ ընդ նմա իցեն``, եւ ի վերայ ազգաց բազմաց որ ընդ նմա:

38:22: եւ դատեցայց զնա արեամբ եւ մահու. եւ հեղեղօք անձրեւաց, եւ վիմօք կարկտի. եւ հուր եւ ծծումբ տեղացից ՚ի վերայ նորա, եւ ՚ի վերայ ամենեցուն որ ընդ նմա իցեն, եւ ՚ի վերայ ազգաց բազմաց որ ընդ նմա։
22 Նրա դատաստանն արիւնով ու համաճարակով եմ տեսնելու, անձրեւների հեղեղներով ու քարէ կարկուտներով. հուր ու ծծումբ եմ տեղալու նրա ու բոլոր նրանց վրայ, որ նրա հետ կը լինեն, բազմաթիւ ժողովուրդների վրայ, որ կը լինեն նրա հետ:
22 Զայն ժանտախտով ու արիւնով պիտի դատեմ եւ անոր վրայ ու անոր զօրքերուն գունդերուն վրայ ու անոր հետ եղող ժողովուրդներուն վրայ յորդահոս անձրեւ ու կարկուտի քարեր, կրակ ու ծծումբ պիտի տեղան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:2238:22 И буду судиться с ним моровою язвою и кровопролитием, и пролью на него и на полки его и на многие народы, которые с ним, всепотопляющий дождь и каменный град, огонь и серу;
38:23 καὶ και and; even μεγαλυνθήσομαι μεγαλυνω enlarge; magnify καὶ και and; even ἁγιασθήσομαι αγιαζω hallow καὶ και and; even ἐνδοξασθήσομαι ενδοξαζω make glorious καὶ και and; even γνωσθήσομαι γινωσκω know ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste πολλῶν πολυς much; many καὶ και and; even γνώσονται γινωσκω know ὅτι οτι since; that ἐγώ εγω I εἰμι ειμι be κύριος κυριος lord; master
38:23 וְ wᵊ וְ and הִתְגַּדִּלְתִּי֙ hiṯgaddiltˌî גדל be strong וְ wᵊ וְ and הִתְקַדִּשְׁתִּ֔י hiṯqaddištˈî קדשׁ be holy וְ wᵊ וְ and נֹ֣ודַעְתִּ֔י nˈôḏaʕtˈî ידע know לְ lᵊ לְ to עֵינֵ֖י ʕênˌê עַיִן eye גֹּויִ֣ם gôyˈim גֹּוי people רַבִּ֑ים rabbˈîm רַב much וְ wᵊ וְ and יָדְע֖וּ yāḏᵊʕˌû ידע know כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that אֲנִ֥י ʔᵃnˌî אֲנִי i יְהוָֽה׃ ס [yᵊhwˈāh] . s יְהוָה YHWH
38:23. et magnificabor et sanctificabor et notus ero in oculis gentium multarum et scient quia ego DominusAnd I will be magnified, and I will be sanctified: and I will be known in the eyes of many nations and they shall know that I am the Lord.
23. And I will magnify myself, and sanctify myself, and I will make myself known in the eyes of many nations; and they shall know that I am the LORD.
And I will plead against him with pestilence and with blood; and I will rain upon him, and upon his bands, and upon the many people that [are] with him, an overflowing rain, and great hailstones, fire, and brimstone:

38:22 И буду судиться с ним моровою язвою и кровопролитием, и пролью на него и на полки его и на многие народы, которые с ним, всепотопляющий дождь и каменный град, огонь и серу;
38:23
καὶ και and; even
μεγαλυνθήσομαι μεγαλυνω enlarge; magnify
καὶ και and; even
ἁγιασθήσομαι αγιαζω hallow
καὶ και and; even
ἐνδοξασθήσομαι ενδοξαζω make glorious
καὶ και and; even
γνωσθήσομαι γινωσκω know
ἐναντίον εναντιον next to; before
ἐθνῶν εθνος nation; caste
πολλῶν πολυς much; many
καὶ και and; even
γνώσονται γινωσκω know
ὅτι οτι since; that
ἐγώ εγω I
εἰμι ειμι be
κύριος κυριος lord; master
38:23
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הִתְגַּדִּלְתִּי֙ hiṯgaddiltˌî גדל be strong
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הִתְקַדִּשְׁתִּ֔י hiṯqaddištˈî קדשׁ be holy
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נֹ֣ודַעְתִּ֔י nˈôḏaʕtˈî ידע know
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עֵינֵ֖י ʕênˌê עַיִן eye
גֹּויִ֣ם gôyˈim גֹּוי people
רַבִּ֑ים rabbˈîm רַב much
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָדְע֖וּ yāḏᵊʕˌû ידע know
כִּֽי־ kˈî- כִּי that
אֲנִ֥י ʔᵃnˌî אֲנִי i
יְהוָֽה׃ ס [yᵊhwˈāh] . s יְהוָה YHWH
38:23. et magnificabor et sanctificabor et notus ero in oculis gentium multarum et scient quia ego Dominus
And I will be magnified, and I will be sanctified: and I will be known in the eyes of many nations and they shall know that I am the Lord.
23. And I will magnify myself, and sanctify myself, and I will make myself known in the eyes of many nations; and they shall know that I am the LORD.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jw▾ jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
23. “Величие” - впервые у Иез, ср. Ис X:15; Дан ХI,16. “Явлю Себя” - то же впервые. Бог тогда будет познан землей так полно и глубоко, как не мог быть познан ранее. Но вполне - едва ли: после событий XL-XLVIII гл. это познание будет еще полнее.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
38:23: magnify: Eze 36:23
and I: Eze 38:16, Eze 37:28, Eze 39:7, Eze 39:13, Eze 39:27; Psa 9:16; Rev 15:3, Rev 15:4, Rev 19:1-6
John Gill
38:23 Thus will l magnify myself, and sanctify myself,.... Show the greatness of his power, and the strictness of his justice and holiness, and glorify these, and all other of his perfections, in the destruction of the enemies of his people:
and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I am the Lord; Heathen nations shall now come to the knowledge of the true God, and his Son Jesus Christ, and of the Christian religion, and shall embrace and profess it; See Gill on Ezek 38:16, the kingdoms of the world will now become the Lord's, Rev_ 11:15.
John Wesley
38:23 Magnify - Undeniably prove that I am the mighty, just, faithful, wise, holy, and merciful God. Sanctify - Declare I am holy, and true to my word.
38:2338:23: Եւ մեծացա՛յց եւ սուրբ եղէց, եւ փառաւորեցայց եւ ծանուցայց առաջի ազգաց բազմաց. եւ ծանիցեն թէ ե՛ս եմ Տէր։
23 Այսպէս եմ ես ցոյց տալու իմ մեծութիւնը, սրբանալու եմ, փառաւորուելու ու ճանաչուելու ազգերի առաջ: Ու պիտի իմանան, որ ես եմ Տէրը”»:
23 Եւ շատ ազգերու առջեւ պիտի փառաւորուիմ ու սրբուիմ եւ ճանչցուիմ ու պիտի գիտնան թէ՝ ե՛ս եմ Տէրը’»։
Եւ մեծացայց եւ սուրբ եղէց, [835]եւ փառաւորեցայց`` եւ ծանուցայց առաջի ազգաց բազմաց, եւ ծանիցեն թէ ես եմ Տէր:

38:23: Եւ մեծացա՛յց եւ սուրբ եղէց, եւ փառաւորեցայց եւ ծանուցայց առաջի ազգաց բազմաց. եւ ծանիցեն թէ ե՛ս եմ Տէր։
23 Այսպէս եմ ես ցոյց տալու իմ մեծութիւնը, սրբանալու եմ, փառաւորուելու ու ճանաչուելու ազգերի առաջ: Ու պիտի իմանան, որ ես եմ Տէրը”»:
23 Եւ շատ ազգերու առջեւ պիտի փառաւորուիմ ու սրբուիմ եւ ճանչցուիմ ու պիտի գիտնան թէ՝ ե՛ս եմ Տէրը’»։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
38:2338:23 и покажу Мое величие и святость Мою, и явлю Себя пред глазами многих народов, и узнают, что Я Господь.
Thus will I magnify myself, and sanctify myself; and I will be known in the eyes of many nations, and they shall know that I [am] the LORD:

38:23 и покажу Мое величие и святость Мою, и явлю Себя пред глазами многих народов, и узнают, что Я Господь.
ru▾